JP2018043026A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 is configured to include a liquid crystal display device having an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and a movable decoration part 3710 arranged behind the liquid crystal display device. The upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are movable in a vertical direction while separating from each other, and the movable decoration part 3710 appears from a rear of the display device to a front of the display device through a space formed by the movement. Thus, large movement of the movable decoration part 3710 is achieved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when winning is won.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning game ball at the starting port. Then, when a game ball is won at the start opening, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is made. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating that the winning combination is won, and the opening / closing member of the big prize opening is operated, so that it is more for the player. A special game that can be awarded a prize is offered.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the action of the effect accessory is used for the effect based on the result of the determination related to the winning combination. Through such effects, the performance is improved until special games are played.

JP 2010-187791 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a concern about a decrease in gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: Determination means for determining based on the progress of the game;
Display means for performing display according to the result of determination by the determination means;
With specific ornaments that are movably provided,
The display means includes
The first display area and the second display area have a first display area and a second display area, and the first display area and the second display area are mutually displayed in a state where a specific effect image is displayed across the two display areas. At least one of these display areas is movable so that the positional relationship of
The specific ornament is
When the specific effect image is displayed across the first display area and the second display area across a specific place where the specific effect image cannot be displayed, the display areas are displayed in front view. It can be positioned so as to overlap the specific part between
further,
The specific ornament is
In a front view, when positioned so as to overlap with the specific part between the first display area and the second display area, the specific effect image cannot be displayed and includes the specific part. 1st display area and said 2nd display area are located in the form of straddling in front view ahead of those display areas, and said 1st display across said specific location It is possible to emit light at the position in front of the specific effect image displayed in a manner straddling the area and the second display area,
further,
The specific ornament can form one ornament with other ornaments,
In the state where the one decoration is formed, among the plurality of decorations forming the one decoration, the specific decoration includes the first display area and the second display area including the specific part. The predetermined decorations included in the other decorations are positioned so as to overlap the first display area in front view with respect to both the display area and the front side of the display area. The gaming machine is located at a position that does not overlap with the second display area when viewed from the front.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, abbreviate | omitting the left frame member, (b) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right production | presentation unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a right perspective view of a game board. It is a left perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view (perspective view) of a game board. It is the front view and sectional drawing of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game panel. Panel board front view, sectional view, back view It is a front view, a sectional view, and a back view of the center accessory. It is a front view of a game panel, an enlarged view of the vicinity of the guide exit, and a sectional view of the vicinity of the guide exit. It is a front view of a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back decoration unit. It is an expansion perspective view of a warp passage. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rear side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rear side accessory unit. It is a front view and a rear view. Back box + right channel perspective view Right channel permeation diagram It is a disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal drive unit. It is the front view and sectional drawing of a liquid crystal drive unit in the state where the upper liquid crystal display device has not moved. It is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved. It is the front view and sectional drawing of a liquid crystal drive unit after an upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit after the upper liquid crystal display device is moved. It is the front view and sectional drawing of a liquid-crystal holding member of the state which the upper liquid crystal display device has not moved. It is a perspective view of the liquid crystal holding member in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved. It is the front view and sectional drawing of a liquid-crystal holding member after an upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a perspective view of the liquid-crystal holding member after an upper liquid crystal display device movement. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation effect of a liquid crystal decoration member. It is a figure which shows the front view and back view of a trunk | drum drive part. It is a figure which shows the perspective view of a trunk | drum drive part. It is a front view of the back unit in the state where the body drive part became visible. It is a figure explaining the hidden board attached to the back surface of a trunk | drum drive part. It is a figure explaining the initial state of the movable decoration part of a trunk | drum drive part. It is a figure explaining the state which the movable decoration part of the trunk | drum drive part advanced. It is a figure explaining the state which the movable decoration part of the trunk | drum drive part isolate | separated. It is a figure explaining the state which the movable decoration part of the trunk | drum drive part deform | transformed (combined). It is the front view and perspective view of the game board before the production start. It is the front view and perspective view of a game board in the state where the liquid crystal opened. FIG. 122 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body drive unit in the state of FIG. 121. It is the front view and perspective view of a game board in the state where the trunk advanced. 123 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body drive unit in the state of FIG. 123. FIG. It is the front view and perspective view of a game board in the state where the parts of the body were separated. 125 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body drive unit in the state of FIG. 125. FIG. It is the front view and perspective view of the state game board where the trunk was completed. 127 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body drive unit in the state of FIG. 127. FIG. It is the front view and perspective view of the state game board which united was completed. It is a figure which shows an example of a main control board block diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of a periphery control board block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side power activation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is discharged by the payout device 830. The upper full-ball path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full-discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guide path that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guideway that guides the game balls released from the full tank outlet to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. And a lower full sphere path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A panel ornament 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the rear, a flat gaming panel 2000 that is attached to the rear side of the panel ornament 1000 and defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a, and the rear of the gaming panel 2000 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the side and opened upward, and a main control board 4100 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes that are installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 2000 and can receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 2000 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a that extends in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. In the horizontal portion 71, the discharge hole 74 is in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 is fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. FIG. The description will be given with reference. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock body 63 are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protrusion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66 a only contacts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk of being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, etc., has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a vertically long rectangle. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and is attached to the handle body 502 and a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A stop button that can be operated by a cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is attached in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and having the front side opened. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entry. A switching mechanism that switches the game ball that has entered from the mouth 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the touch unit disassembled, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the lower right door production unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door production unit, and FIG. 43 (a) shows the lower right door production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from back. FIG. 44 is a DD cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 49A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit with the door lower right rotating body facing forward, and FIG. 49B is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing rear.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5 a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges forward greatly and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board 4140 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown in the drawing, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to be transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is open on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving part 230c is formed in the shape of a pyramid cylinder so that it may narrow as it goes below (refer FIG. 41). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a by fitting the linear light-emitting portion 237b into the notch 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 from the upper dish 201 to the lower dish 202 (removal). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, and an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from above. A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the disk base body 255a and the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Then, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled, and the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the rendering operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Thereby, in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the shock from the touch unit 220B is also absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on both the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220 </ b> B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220 </ b> B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends leftward and rightward, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 4140 and later, and.

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 49B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the gaming state, and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from falling.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 50B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower tray 202 do not fall downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projection 322a is released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220 near the right end in front view and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card inserted is returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 and the like, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed, and the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. In comparison with the player, it is easier for the player to notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is in any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the door frame foul cover unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 55A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 that is open on the front side. A flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and passes through the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiving port 528 that opens toward the rear on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 in the front view and communicates with the full guide path 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 that are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front are released. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a plate-shaped movable piece 534 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 has a certain amount in the storage passage 533 when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by a full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing section 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact section 537, the guide path door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 as viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. And the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. And a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front. And.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is attached to the rear end to be rotatable. The rear extension part 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to a position slightly lower on the left side of the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for axial support, and a door frame extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of 3. .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. FIG. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the game ball driving strength changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled as the main structure. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 70A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of a payout blade in the payout device.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 75A is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75B is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 78 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 180) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged in the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends passing through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height from the introduction portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821 The detection portion 821e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a height center along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the movable piece member front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 180). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 825 are movable. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the single member 826 is detected by one single ball break detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball break detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a can be changed depending on the weight of the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826 by its own weight and the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. It has a box shape with the front side open, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are paid. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout vanes 839 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 abuts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d, from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 71) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60B). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guiding path 862, and a lower bulb guiding path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 180).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. When the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and is fully filled. It is discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full-ball path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guiding it from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends from the base portion 863a obliquely to the upper left side in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 526, the full tank reception port 530, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is provided. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 78B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. A through ball passage 526 and a full tank reception port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has a larger number of game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 is provided. Game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. And when the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 by storing the game ball in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 relative to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In such a state, the number can be filled in the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, in a gaming state where a lot of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are released by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls. A box 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the left front, FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the right, and FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. FIG. 84A is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 84B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA along the center of the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear.

  The gaming board 5 according to the present embodiment has a panel ornament 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear end of the gaming area 5a. A board-like game panel 2000 that divides the game panel, a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 2000, and the game panel 2000 and the back unit 3000 that are attached to the rear lower part of the panel decoration 1000. And a substrate holder 1200 to be configured. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 2000.

  Further, the game board 5 includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 130) attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and performing control related to the progress of the game, and a main control unit 1300 (main control board). 4100), a function display unit 1400 which displays a game situation based on a control signal from the control unit 4100 and is attached to the lower left corner of the panel ornament 1000 so as to be visible to the player side. Peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140) for performing production control based on a control signal from unit 1300 (main control board 4100), and further attached to the front side of the rear portion of back unit 3000, is a game in front view. The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140) arranged in the center of the region 5a Such as a liquid crystal display device 3600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image based on et control signals is also provided.

  However, as will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and these upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device. 3620 is provided with a structure that can move up and down. As a result, the back unit 3000 also has a special production space in which the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be moved, a special space that secures a drive unit that applies driving force to the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the like. It is provided with a structure. In this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 has a longer length in the vertical direction and a smaller width than the lower liquid crystal display device 3620.

  In the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment, a specific effect image can be displayed across the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and thereby a large display effect can be obtained. It can be realized or can be performed in cooperation with the two display units.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the game board 5 includes a panel ornament 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-like game panel 2000 that is attached to the rear side of the panel ornament 1000, and a game And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the panel 2000. The game panel 2000 is provided with a start port unit 2200 having a first start port 2002, a first grand prize winning port, and the like, and a center accessory 2500 on the front surface. The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 and a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The back box 3010 has a box shape, and a front side accessory unit 3200 (a face driving part 3210, a shoulder driving part 3220, a full burst driving part (lower part) 3230, a right guiding path 3250) is attached to the rear wall. It is done. In addition, a front accessory that is attached to the front side of the front accessory unit 3200 and is mounted with a decoration unit 3100 (back ornament upper unit 3110, back ornament left unit 3120, back ornament lower unit 3130) is located at the standby position. Each of the units 3200 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

  The liquid crystal storage unit 3480 of the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 is box-shaped and stores the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. A liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is attached in front of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. When the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 and the back box are configured to approach the front surfaces of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the rear end of the back box 3010. A stepped portion 3315 is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as not to interfere with 3010. The step 3315 is provided in accordance with the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. On the rear surface of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400, a main control unit 1300, a peripheral control unit 1500, and a rear end decoration unit 3700 are attached.

  In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is provided with a structure capable of meeting such a request as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 84B, the rear decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620 as the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500. It is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 so as not to overlap the effect space created when it moves when viewed in front. As a result, the production space created when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved can be utilized to the maximum in the depth direction. The driving unit 3700 can be provided. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), a body drive unit 3700 protruding rearward from the rear end of the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the thickness of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in front thereof are attached. By providing the thicker movable decoration portion 3710, it is possible to provide a realistic effect.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the thick portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thickness is realized as a movable effect that opposes the player side. Therefore, even if the effect space opened by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is made relatively small, after passing through the effect space, the thick portion is made to face the player side. Thus, it is possible to provide a movable effect larger than the area of the effect space in the front view.

[5-1. Panel decoration]
Next, the panel decoration 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 85 and FIG.

  The panel ornament 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape, and an outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by an inner periphery of the inner shape. The panel ornament 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the panel ornament 1000 along the line 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper left part in the front view, and the game area 5 a And an out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The panel ornament 1000 extends from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the panel ornament 1000, and the upper rail is curved to the inside of the panel ornament 1000. 1005, and a stopper 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and a game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1001 contacts.

  Further, the panel decoration 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the outer rail 1001 and the front view clockwise. The backflow prevention member 1007 is rotated only in the open position where the space between the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 is opened, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. Is provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 2000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel 2000. FIG. 88A is a front view of the panel plate 2100, FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the panel plate 2100, and FIG. 88C is a rear view of the panel plate 2100. 88A is a front view of the center accessory 2500, FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the center accessory 2500, and FIG. 88C is a rear view of the center accessory 2500. FIG. 89A is a front view of the gaming panel 2000, FIG. 89B is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the guide outlet, and FIG. 89C is an AA cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the guide outlet.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the gaming panel 2000 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped panel ornament 1000, and is a transparent flat panel panel 2100 and the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a. The start port unit 2200 attached immediately above the out port 1111 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a. The start port unit 2200 and the center accessory 2500 are attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 2100, and the rear end passes through the opening 2112. It protrudes backward from the rear surface of the panel plate 2100.

  In addition, the gaming panel 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball that has been driven into the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are a gaming area. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that a game ball can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball; and a game ball Accepts game balls into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which allows game balls to be received in accordance with the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003. A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by There.

  Here, the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged near the lower left corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front or near the lower right position of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. Of these, the general winning opening 2001 disposed near the lower left of the game area 5a when viewed from the front is provided with two openings that can simultaneously receive a plurality of game balls. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 on the right center in front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed between the stop portion 1006 and the gate portion 2003. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting port 2002 when viewed from the front. Of the plurality of general winning ports 2001 described above, the general winning port 2001 disposed near the lower right in front view in the game area 5a is disposed immediately above the first major winning port 2005. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003.

[5-2a. Panel board]
Next, the panel plate 2100 of the gaming panel 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  The panel board 2100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Panel panel 2100 has a plurality of openings 2112 that pass through in the front-rear direction and for attaching starter unit 2200, center accessory 2500, and the like. Furthermore, a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the start port unit 2200, the center accessory 2500, and the back unit 3000 are formed.

  In a state where the gaming panel 2000 is attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000, the out opening 1111 of the panel plate 2100 is opened to the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the panel decoration 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear outlet 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, passes through the outlet 1111 and is discharged to the rear side of the gaming panel 2000.

  That is, the panel plate 2100 is, as is well known, the game area 5a as a flow path through which a game ball flows down when the starter unit 2200 and the center accessory 2500 as well as the panel decoration 1000 are attached. It is a part provided for the purpose of being created in the form of compartment formation. However, as will be described later, in the upper part of the panel plate 2100 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball can pass is not formed in the upper part, and the panel decoration 1000 is not formed. In the attached state, the “margin portion 2113” having a narrow shape that is less than the diameter of the game ball is limited to being formed by the outer rail 1001.

  As will be described later, the margin part 2113 is a part that is thinner than the other regions and is provided with a concave shape in front view. In the concave part, the center accessory 2500 can be attached with a screw or the like. A plurality of mounting holes 2113a are formed. Further, as will be described later, the margin part 2113 is formed from a position facing the exit of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) to a position facing the stopper part 1006. It is possible to contribute to stabilization of the flow in the high-speed flow down section until the game ball hit from the rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) vigorously hits the stop 1006 and the momentum is killed. ing.

  Further, the mounting holes 2113a are also formed in other areas of the panel plate 2100 different from the above-mentioned margin part 2113, and the front decorations such as the center accessory 2500 are attached to these areas by screws or the like. It is possible.

[5-2b. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The start port unit 2200 is provided from the lower left center in front of the game area 5a to the out port 1111 and further to the lower right portion, and is attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front. The starting port unit 2200 includes a warp inlet 2220, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a first major winning port 2005, and a V winning unit 2210.

  The warp inlet 2220 is formed at the upper left end of the start port unit 2200 so as to protrude from the front surface, and can receive a game ball from above the game area. The game ball received at the warp inlet 2220 is guided to the back side of the game board 5, passes through a warp hole 2123 formed in the panel plate 2100, and enters a warp passage 2521 disposed on the back side of the panel plate 2100. It is guided and flows down on the stage 2530 formed in the center accessory 2500. The warp relation will be described later.

  The general winning opening 2001 is arranged so as to protrude from the front face to the lower left and lower right of the start opening unit 2200. In addition, a shelf 2203 that protrudes forward and extends to the right and left so that the right end side when viewed from the front is lowered is formed between the warp entrance 2220 and the general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower left. The left end of the shelf 2203 is substantially in contact with the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5 a) by the shelf 2203. . The general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower left is open toward the upper left when viewed from the front, and is configured to easily accept a game ball that has flowed down on the shelf 2203, for example. The general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right is arranged immediately above the first major winning opening 2005 and is opened upward, and can receive a game ball flowing down the right hit game area 2540 of the game area 5a. It has become.

  The first start port 2002 is arranged so as to protrude from the front surface directly above the out port 1111, and has a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the receiving port opens upward. In addition, since the decorative plate 2205 is disposed in front of the first start port 2002, the player cannot visually recognize the entrance of the game ball when viewed from the front. The game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the starting port switch 3022 (first starting port switch), and then passes through the starting port passage hole 2122 formed in the panel plate 2100 and is guided to the back surface side. Is done.

  The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged directly below the general prize opening 2001 so as to protrude from the front surface to the upper right of the first start opening 2002. In the first grand prize opening 2005, the upper side is rotatably supported by the start opening unit 2200, and in the normal gaming state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), it faces the player perpendicular to the game board 5. A plate-like first big prize opening door member 2112 is provided so as to close the reception opening of the first big prize opening 2005 in a state of projecting. When the game state is shifted to the big hit game state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 is placed in a state in which the lower side rotates backward and downward when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized to accept the game ball flowing down. The game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 2005 are counted by the count switch 2110 and are guided to the back side through a guide path provided in the start port unit 2200.

  A V winning opening 2021 is arranged at the right end of the start opening unit 2200, and when a game ball wins, a predetermined lottery is performed. The game ball that has won the V winning opening 2021 passes through a guide path provided inside the start opening unit 2200 and is guided to the back side.

[5-2c. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90A is a front view of the center accessory 2500, FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA, and FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 2100, and FIG. 90 (b) is a view for explaining an attachment portion between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100 in the vicinity of the guide rail exit. (C) is sectional drawing of the attachment part of the center actor 2500 and the panel board 2100. FIG.

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2200 and substantially in the upper center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 2100 of the game panel 2000. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the liquid crystal display device 3600 disposed behind the game panel 2000 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. . The center accessory 2500 has a gate part 2003, a second start port 2004, and a second grand prize port 2006.

  The center accessory 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 2100 along the periphery of the opening 2112 that penetrates largely front and rear in the center of the panel plate 2100, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents entry of a game ball into the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 2112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a stage 2530 extending left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 2220 provided in the start port unit 2200 circulate through a warp passage 3050 (see FIGS. 94, 95, etc.) provided on the back side of the panel plate 2100, and are provided in the back unit 3000. The warp outlet 2522 is discharged onto the stage 2530. In the stage 2530, the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 2530 and then is released into the game area 5a.

  In a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game ball that enters the warp inlet 2220 in the game area 5a and is supplied to the stage 2530 through the warp passage 2521, the warp outlet 2522, and the guide path 2523 is near the center of the stage 2530. Is released to the front and returned to the game area 5a again (refluxed). Further, in the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first start port 2002 located immediately below the center portion, and when a game ball is released from the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, there is a high probability. The first start port 2002 is received.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 90, the flange portion 2511 provided on the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment is formed in accordance with the shape of the margin portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100. When facing the shape of the margin part 2113 of the panel plate 2100, the depression shape of the margin part 2113 is just filled with the thickness of the flange part 2511 and is almost the same as the other area of the panel plate 2100. It is provided with a structure that creates a height.

  That is, in the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment, in a state where the flange portion 2511 provided in the upper portion is positioned so as to face the recessed portion shape of the marginal portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100 in this way, By screwing each of the plurality of mounting holes 2113a in the margin portion 2113, it is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 2100, and is formed on the narrow “margin portion 2113” side as described above. An unobtainable game ball channel is formed on the flange portion 2511 (center accessory 2500) side. As described above, the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 can be greatly sharpened, and as a result, the depth space as a gaming machine can be expanded upward.

  In such a configuration, the upper flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is extended from the frame-like portion to a position facing (close to) the outer rail 1001 of the panel ornament 1000. The flange portion 2511 does not cause a step between other regions of the panel plate 2100.

  And the flow path of the game ball formed in the flange part 2511 side of the upper part of such a center accessory 2500 is the exit of a guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) according to the shape of the margin part 2113. Is formed from the position facing to the position facing the stopper 1006. Therefore, in the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment, the game balls from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are placed in the flow path of the game balls formed on the flange portion 2511 side of the upper portion. Left guide passage 2580 that guides the game ball to the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500, and right guidance that guides the game ball to the game area 5a (right game area 2540) on the right side of the center character 2500 A passage 2590 is formed.

  Of these, the right guide passage 2590 has a width (flange width) that allows one game ball to roll, whereas the left guide passage 2580 includes a right guide passage 2590 and a right guide passage 2590. A portion where the game ball can roll at substantially the same position and a portion where the game ball can roll below the right guide passage 2590 are provided. That is, a game ball that is rolling at approximately the same position as the right guide passage 2590 in the left guide passage 2580 may roll as it is to the right guide passage 2590, whereas the right guide passage 2590 However, the game ball that rolls downward is not likely to roll to the right guide passage 2590 and is guided to the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

  In addition, a portion of the left guide passage 2580 where the game ball can roll below the right guide passage 2590 is integrally formed with the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 and a convex shape. A plurality of obstacle structures 2581 are provided, and a game ball is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500 through any of a plurality of flow paths formed between these obstacle structures 2581 (valleys). It is guided to the area 5a. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to use an obstruction nail when forming a plurality of flow paths in the left guide passage 2580, so that the flange portion 2511 can be formed thin. become.

  It should be noted that, in the left guide passage 2580, whether or not the game ball rolls below the right guide passage 2590, and the plurality of flow paths formed between the plurality of obstacle structures 2581. Which of the game balls rolls is determined by the magnitude of the firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle when the handle lever 504 is rotated, and the game ball strikes according to the skill on the player side. It can be divided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90, the right guide passage 2590 of the center accessory 2500 is formed from a portion communicating with the left guide passage 2580 to a position facing the stop portion 1006. This is a part for guiding and supplying the game ball from the left guide passage 2580 to the right-handed game area 2540 formed on the side (the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500).

  However, when the right guide passage 2590 according to this embodiment employs a structure that is screwed to the panel plate 2100 below the stop portion 1006, the screw stop portion is deliberately provided with the panel. By providing a step with the other area of the plate 2100, the ball speed suppressed by the stopper 1006 is further suppressed, and the right hit game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500). The game stability is improved.

  With the structure of the right guide passage 2590, the marginal portion 2113 (concave shape) of the panel plate 2100 is attached below the stop portion 1006 as shown in FIGS. 88 and 90. The holes 2113a are not provided, and the mounting holes 2113a are provided in other areas of the panel plate 2100 that are not depressions.

  That is, the right hit game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500) is an area mainly used for games when a so-called time-shortening function is operating. In such a game state, In many cases, it is required to make the game progress stably and at high speed. In this regard, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the stopper 1006 but also a game ball whose rolling speed is suppressed by the step below it flows down the right hit game area 2540. As a result, it is difficult for variations in the probability of receiving various types of entrances in the right-hand hit game area 2540, and it is possible to improve the stability of the game in the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated. It becomes like this.

  Here, the right hit game area 2540 is defined by the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the right rail 1005 of the panel ornament 1000, and the like, and as the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the vertical direction And the space of the predetermined width whose dimension in the left-right direction is sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The right-handed game area 2540 is an area from the lower side of the stop portion 1006 of the panel decoration 1000 to the vicinity of the second grand prize winning opening 2006. The member which affects is arranged.

  In the right-handed game area 2540, a second start port 2004, a gate portion 2003, and a second big prize port 2006 are arranged as various receiving ports. The second start port 2004 is arranged directly below the upper right circulation space 2541. A gate portion 2003 is disposed below the second start port 2004. Below the gate portion 2003, a second big prize opening 2006 is arranged.

  The gate portion 2003 is provided slightly below the second starting port 2004 and slightly below the middle stage of the decorative member 2545 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and has only one game ball. It is formed so that it can pass in the vertical direction. A gate switch 2352 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003.

  The second starting port 2004 is formed immediately below the stop portion 1006 of the panel ornament 1000 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and open upward. The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by a start port switch 3022 (second start port switch), guided to the back side of the game board 5 and discharged.

  By the way, in recent years, in the gaming machine field, game machine components (such as an accessory and a ball passage) have become more complicated and larger, and a gaming machine that allows a design with a higher degree of freedom is developed. Is required. As described above, since the thickness of the panel board 2100 is thicker than that of the center accessory 2500, as the game area 5a formed by the panel board 2100 increases, the space in the depth direction in the pachinko machine 1 becomes narrower. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom such as the arrangement of gaming machine components will be low.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, both the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 are integrally formed of resin on the center accessory 2500 side. Thereby, it is necessary to provide a spherical passage in the upper part on the panel plate 2100 side (necessary to secure a region extending from the outer rail 1001 to a length equal to or larger than the spherical diameter in a state where the panel ornament 1000 is attached to the panel plate 2100 side). The panel plate 2100 of this embodiment is not formed with a flow path through which the game ball passes. In the first place, since the margin 2113 is provided as a depression shape with respect to other regions, it cannot function as a flow path through which a game ball passes. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 can be made thinner than the panel plate 2100, the left portion of the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 (position facing the exit of the guide rail) is shifted to the right (stop portion). A depth can be provided over the entire area up to the position facing the position 1006, and a depth space on the upper side of the game board can be suitably secured. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible to displace the movable area of the accessory and the movable area of the liquid crystal in the depth direction above the game board 5. .

  More specifically, the upper flange portion of the center accessory is attached to the margin portion 2113 formed on the panel plate 2100 so as to cover it. At this time, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the margin part 2113 has a thin shape that can be screwed to attach the center accessory 2500. Note that the margin 2113 itself does not necessarily exist in the region other than the portion to be screwed.

  Then, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 attached to the margin 2113 formed on the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is connected to the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 together with the outer rail 1001 and the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 Form both. At this time, the game balls passing through the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 are configured not to directly contact the panel plate 2100 including the margin part 2113.

  As described above, the margin part 2113 is formed thinner than the other part of the panel plate 2100, and the margin part 2113 and the flange part 2511 of the center accessory are attached as shown in FIG. In this state, the thickness is substantially the same as that of other portions of the panel plate 2100. For this reason, when the game balls released from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) move from the game panel 2100 to the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory, the rolling becomes unstable due to a step or the like. Inviting a situation of colliding with glass can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the rate of game balls entering the starting port is poor during the game, the frequency at which the player checks the release state (speed, etc.) of the game balls from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Is known to tend to be high. However, a hot effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 3600 at the timing when the release state of the game balls from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) is confirmed, or a movable accessory in front of the center accessory 2500 There are many cases where the production by the start or the button production is provided, and if the production opportunity is lost without noticing this, the game entertainment may be lowered.

  In particular, when a joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100 is provided at a position facing the exit (guide exit) of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), the joint is connected to the guide rail (outer rail). Since the game balls from the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) immediately contact each other (the path of the whole ball), the joint (the joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100) is rattled at every launch. There is a concern that the frequency of confirming the guidance exit by the player may be increased due to the adverse effect such as the occurrence of the game ball and the deterioration of the entrance rate of the game ball.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the recess shape (the margin portion 2113) is formed at a position facing the exit (guide exit) of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) in the panel plate 2100. After the formation, the mounting holes 2113a are provided in the opposing depressions. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is attached so as to fill the recess shape (margin portion 2113), a flow path of the game ball is formed on the flange portion 2511 side. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a step in the joint part (joint part between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100) and to be screwed at this position. The play of game balls from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) is less likely to cause rattling (unstabilized rolling of the game balls) at the joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100. It becomes possible to suppress the frequency of confirming the condition, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the loss of the production opportunity.

  Further, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is formed up to the position facing the exit (guide exit) of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), so that the depth space on the back surface side can be reduced. It can be expanded to the vicinity. Thereby, the space for production can be expanded up to the upper side of the pachinko machine, and the lowering of the game entertainment can be suppressed through the design and structure having a higher degree of freedom as a gaming machine.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the position where the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 and the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) face each other is as shown in FIG. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is on the left side of the left end of the visible region from the front. According to such a configuration, the screwing portion between the panel plate 2100 and the flange portion 2511 (the portion in which the production space cannot be created on the back side of the panel plate 2100) is driven to the left side from the left end of the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Will be able to. As a result, it is possible to secure a substantially entire area above the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 as an arrangement space for an accessory, a lamp, and the like, and an effect in cooperation with the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 in the vicinity of the guide exit. Since it becomes easy to design, etc., it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the loss of the production opportunity.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), a flow path through which a game ball can pass is not partitioned at the top of the panel plate 2100. As described above, in the state in which the panel ornament 1000 is attached, the “gap portion 2113” having a thin shape less than the diameter of the game ball is defined by the outer rail 1001.

  In this way, the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is formed as a narrow “margin portion 2113” that is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the thin flange portion 2511 (center accessory 2500) placed on the front side thereof is used. By forming the game ball flow path, the depth space (effect space) on the back side of the panel board 2100 can be expanded to the back side of the game ball flow path at the top.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the region for one upper sphere in the left guide passage 2580 is provided on the back side so as to emit light. And the movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 are arranged so as to overlap with each other when viewed from the front. In this way, two different decorative movable parts (here, a decorative member provided so as to be able to emit light and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) are arranged in the depth direction on the back side of the region of one upper sphere in the left guide passage 2580. The reason why it is possible to secure a space sufficient to be overlaid is that the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is formed as a “spreading portion 2113” having a narrow shape less than the diameter of the game ball. It is clear.

  As described above, the flange portion of the decorative accessory is formed up to the position facing the guide outlet, so that the depth space on the back surface side can be expanded to the vicinity as much as possible. For this reason, it is possible to arrange an accessory, a lamp, or the like used for production in this space, and it is possible to make it difficult to miss the production opportunity when checking around the guidance exit.

  That is, the player has an opportunity to watch the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail in order to adjust the launch of the game ball during the game, and in such a state, it is easy to overlook the contents of the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 3600 Become. In this regard, in the above configuration, the opening 2112 is enlarged to the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail, and a decoration member capable of performing a light emission effect in cooperation with the effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be disposed in the space. It is possible to prevent an effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 3600 from being overlooked while confirming the release state of the game ball in the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail.

  For example, a decorative member provided on the back side of the position facing the guide exit (exit of the guide rails (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002)) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3600 with a specific display effect (operation of the upper plate effect button 257 or the like). If a light is emitted when an effect such as an effect that prompts the user appears, it is possible to enjoy the effect without losing the opportunity to operate the upper plate effect button 257 or the like while confirming the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a portion protruding from the panel decoration 1000 (outer rail 1001) at the top of the panel plate 2100 includes a thick portion and a thin portion. There is a mounting hole 2113a in a thick part. About this thick part, it is desirable to provide it in the upper center of the panel board 2100. That is, considering that the opening is formed in a circular arc shape, the upper center of the panel plate 2100 is located above the other region in the upper part of the panel. In view of the arrangement of the rectangular effect body (liquid crystal display device), even if the portion protruding from the panel decoration 1000 (outer rail 1001) on the upper part of the panel plate 2100 is made thicker than other regions. This is because it is difficult to connect to pressing the depth space for arranging the director. Note that the thick portion may be formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  Panel plate 2100 may be a plate member instead of a transparent resin.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, the left side guide passage 2580 which is the upstream side guide passage where the game ball guided to the game area 5a by the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) rolls and the right side Both guide passages with the guide passage 2590 are formed integrally with the flange portion 2511 at the top of the center accessory 2500. That is, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 has a function of attaching to the panel plate 2100 and a function of a guide path of the left guide path 2580 that guides the game ball to the left game area and the right guide path 2590 that guides the game ball to the right game area. It is comprised so that it may have. Conventionally, it has been necessary to secure an area to be a flow path for a game ball, an area to install the flange portion 2511 for attaching the center accessory 2500, and both areas above the panel plate 2100. For example, since it is not necessary to secure a flow path through which the game ball passes at the upper part on the panel plate 2100 side, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 can be configured to be as close as possible to the outer rail. An opening 2112 for attaching a center accessory 2500 or the like provided in 2100 can be formed large. Thereby, the space in the opening 2112 can be sufficiently secured and utilized, and the structure disposed and driven in the opening 2112 can be increased in size and complicated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the marginal portion 2113, which is an area on the panel plate 2100 side where the flange portion 2511 is installed, is formed in a narrow shape that does not reach the diameter of the game ball. That is, the opening 2112 of the panel plate 2100 is expanded so as to extend to a position overlapping the attached flange portion 2511. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is thinner than the panel plate 2100, the back space of the flange portion 2511 can be expanded in the depth direction as compared to the back space of the panel plate 2100. That is, a range that is defined as a guide passage by the flange portion 2511 on the upper side of the game board (the entire area from the left (position facing the exit of the guide rail) to the right (position facing the stop portion 1006) on the top of the panel board 2100) The space can be expanded to the depth direction.

  In order to enlarge the opening 2112 of the panel board 2100, as shown in FIG. The flange portion 2511 is attached. However, when the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted at a position facing the exit of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), the joint portion with the panel plate 2100 becomes a step due to the thickness of the flange portion 2511. The game balls guided vigorously from the guide rails (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) change the launch direction when they contact the step, and depending on the changed direction, the glass covering the front of the game area The game balls collide and the glass is damaged.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the panel plate 2100 has a panel plate over the region from the position facing the exit of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to the position facing the stopper 1006. 2100 is formed with a recessed portion 2113 having a thickness that is thinner than other regions, and the flange portion of the center accessory 2500 in which both the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 are formed. 2511 is attached in a covering form. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is formed to have the same thickness as the recessed portion of the margin portion 2113, a step is formed between the flange portion 2511 and the other region of the panel plate 2100 when attached to the margin portion 2113. Is not born and can be configured in one plane. Therefore, the flange portion 2511 can be attached to a position facing the exit of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), and the guide rail ( It is possible to reliably guide the launch direction of the game ball guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) along the guide path.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the panel plate 2100 has a wide margin 2113 larger than the diameter of the game ball, in addition to the narrow margin 2113 less than the diameter of the game ball. Is provided in part. A mounting hole 2113a for assembling the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a screw or the like is formed in the wide margin 2113. Assembling the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a screw to the wide margin 2113 ensures the strength.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 2000 from the lower side in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 2000 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a payout control board 4110 for controlling game contents and game ball payout, the main control board 4100, and a power supply board for generating and supplying control power to these boards. And a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by looking at the opening and closing traces, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 4100 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82, and 84. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the panel decoration 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 4100.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has two LEDs based on a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for indicating the number of hold, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of change display has not yet been established, and the reception of a game ball to the first start opening 2002 (start winning prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by The first special symbol display that displays the LED in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is still a variation display By receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004 (occurrence of a start winning) by a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying a hold number that is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied. A second special that displays the eight special LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the lottery second special lottery result. Displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the variable display start condition has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 L The number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 when the second special holding number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are “big hit” or the like And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  In the function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 86. FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 131) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 4100, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 4140. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling the light emission effect, the sound effect, the movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (see FIG. 128). ).

[5-7. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82, 84, and 85. The liquid crystal display device 3600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 2000. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back unit 3000. The liquid crystal display device 3600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The liquid crystal display device 3600 is a full-color display device using white LEDs as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The liquid crystal display device 3600 of this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and each is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. When each liquid crystal display device is at the reference position (the state in which the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned at the lowermost position), between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, A liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is disposed, and can be moved up and down independently of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 or in conjunction with one of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620. The upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 are attached to a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 that includes an actuator (motor) for driving each of them. The liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is included in the back unit 3000. The operation modes of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 will be described later.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. 91A is a view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 91B is a view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 2000, and as shown in FIGS. A front side accessory unit 3200 including an accessory that constitutes a head, an arm, a leg, and the like, and a liquid crystal display device 3600 and a driving mechanism (transmission mechanism) thereof are provided. And a rear accessory unit 3300.

  As will be described later, the rear unit 3000 (the rear unit of the rear accessory unit 3300) according to this embodiment includes a control unit such as a main control board box 1320 and a peripheral control board box 1520, as well as an upper part. A rear-end decoration unit 3700 having an accessory that can move from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 to the front side when at least one of the liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves. (Torso drive part) is attached to the rear side.

[5-9a. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration unit 3100, where (a) is the back decoration upper unit 3110, (b) is the back decoration left unit 3120, and (c) is the back decoration lower unit 3130.

  The back decoration unit 3100 is a decorative member disposed behind the panel board 2100 of the game panel 2000 and behind the center accessory 2500. The back decoration upper unit 3110, the back decoration left unit 3120, and the back decoration lower unit 3130. And is configured. Further, the back decoration unit 3100 can be visually recognized through the panel board 2100 formed with transparency, and at least a part of the movable accessory provided in the front accessory unit 3200 is on the player side when not operating. It is provided so that it is difficult to see from.

  Here, the back decoration upper unit 3110 is disposed so as to cover the upper side of the opening. Further, the back decoration left unit 3120 is arranged from the central part on the left side of the opening to the upper side. The back decoration lower unit 3130 is arranged so as to cover the entire lower side from the central part on the left side of the opening.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 91, 92, 94 (c), and 95, a warp passage 3150 is formed in the back decoration lower unit 3130. FIG. 95 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the warp passage of the back unit. The warp passage 3150 is a flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed to the start port unit 2200 to the warp inlet 2220 to flow down to the stage 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500. As described above, the warp passage is not formed in the center accessory 2500, but is formed so that the game ball passes through the back side of the panel plate 2100, so that the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the warp passage 3150 can be increased. That is, it becomes possible to arrange the warp inlet regardless of the shape of the center accessory 2500.

[5-9b. Front character unit]
Next, the front accessory unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the front accessory unit 3200, where (a) is a face driving unit 3210, full burst driving unit (lower accessory) 3230, and (b) is a shoulder driving unit 3220, (c). ) Is a full burst drive unit (lower part) 3230, and (d) is a right guide path 3250.

  The front accessory unit 3200 is attached to the back of the back decoration unit 3100, and includes a face driving unit 3210, a shoulder driving unit 3220, a full burst driving unit (lower accessory) 3230, and a right guide path 3250. Yes.

  Here, the face drive unit 3210 includes a left face part 3210a and a right face part 3210b as movable accessories, and further includes a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable accessories. These movable accessories and driving mechanisms are disposed on the back side of the back ornament upper unit 3110 and are difficult to see from the player side when a specific movable effect is not being executed (when not operating). On the other hand, in a state where the specific movable effect is executed (during operation), first, the robot moves downward, and then moves in the central direction on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to thereby move the face of the robot. It is provided to shape. Details of the effect by the face driving unit 3210 will be described later.

  The shoulder drive unit 3220 includes a left arm unit 3220a and a right arm unit 3220b, and further includes a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable accessories. The shoulder drive unit 3220 is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the shoulder drive unit 3220 in the same manner as the face drive unit 3210 when the movable effect is not executed. Specifically, the left arm portion 3220a is disposed on the back side of the back decoration left unit 3120, and the right arm portion 3220b is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 2545 provided in the center accessory 2500. When performing the performance, the left arm portion 3220a and the right arm portion 3220b move in the center direction, and an effect is performed as if the rear arm ornament unit 3700 (body driving unit) described later is combined.

  The full burst drive unit 3230 is different from the production conditions in which a specific movable production is performed by each of the above-described drive units (the face drive unit 3210, the shoulder drive unit 3220, and the rear end decoration unit 3700 (torso drive unit)). When the above condition is satisfied, a drive mechanism including a lower accessory that moves to the front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 alone to produce an effect and an actuator for driving the lower accessory is provided.

  However, of the drive mechanism of the full burst drive unit 3230, the right rail portion 3240 of the rail portion that allows the lower accessory to slide up and down is provided separately from the full burst drive unit 3230. The right guide path 3250 is provided integrally with a right rail portion 3240 provided as a separate body. In addition, as will be described later, the right rail portion 3240 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 2545 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right accessory path 3250 is connected to the rear accessory unit 3300 described later. A game ball received in the receiving port by communicating with a receiving port (for example, a starting port) in the right-handed game area 2540 after providing a discharge passage between the back box 3310 and the rear box 3310. Can be discharged from the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Rear side unit]
Next, the rear accessory unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 together. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the rear accessory unit 3300 disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the rear accessory unit 3300 for each main component viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The rear accessory unit 3300 is attached to the rear of the front accessory unit 3200, and includes a back box 3310, a liquid crystal driving unit 3400, and a rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving unit) in order from the front side. Yes.

[5-9c-1. Back box]
First, the back box 3310 in the rear accessory unit 3300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99A is a view of the back box 3310 as seen from the front, and FIG. 99B is a view as seen from the back.

  The back box 3310 has a box shape with the front open, and an opening 3311 that penetrates the rear standing wall 3312 in a square shape is formed. The opening 3311 is formed to have substantially the same size (or slightly smaller size) as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3600. As described above, the liquid crystal display 3600 is provided with the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 that can move up and down on the front side. The rear wall 3312 of the back box 3310 has a movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. In addition, a step portion 3315 is formed. That is, in this case, while the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can move in the space secured by the stepped portion 3315, the rear standing wall 3312 is provided on the periphery (lateral side) of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The liquid crystal display device 3600 can be disposed in the vicinity of a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for driving the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  That is, although the above-mentioned front side accessory unit 3200 is arranged on the back side of the back decoration unit 3100, it is difficult to see from the player side. Existence is easily grasped. In this regard, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is close to the rear standing wall 3312 to such an extent that a stepped portion 3315 that matches the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is formed. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided there even if it is viewed from the side. Thereby, at least in a state where the liquid crystal display device 3600 is not driven, various members provided on the rear side of the rear standing wall 3312 including the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The presence of the rear-end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) can be kept secret from the player side.

  Moreover, the rear standing wall 3312 according to this embodiment serves as a back box concealment unit that conceals the presence of the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit), and the like. In addition to functioning, a mounted portion (mounting hole or the like) of the front accessory unit 3200 having a plurality of movable bodies (driving portions) is provided on the front side thereof, and a support portion of the front accessory unit 3200 It is supposed to function as well. According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid viewing the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) provided at the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 3600 without wasting space in the depth direction.

  Thereby, in addition to the front side accessory unit 3200, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) can be viewed from the front, although the installation space is scarce in the depth direction. It can be appropriately arranged separately for those that should be visually recognized and those that should not be visually recognized in front view.

  In addition, the face drive unit 3210 of the front accessory unit 3200 is attached to a portion of the rear standing wall 3312 that is above the opening 3011 in front view. In addition, a shoulder drive unit 3220 including a left arm portion and a right arm portion is attached to the rear standing wall 3312 from the upper left end of the opening 3011 to the center and from the upper right end of the front view to the center. In addition, a full burst driving unit 3230 is attached to the rear standing wall 3312 along the lower end and the lower side from the center on the left side of the opening 3011 when viewed from the front.

  Furthermore, in the back box 3310 according to this embodiment, the right side rail portion 3240 (the right guide path 3250) is disposed near the front end of the lower right corner of the rear standing wall 3312 when viewed from the front, so that a discharge passage is provided therebetween. (The passage that guides the lower right ball passage unit 3316 and further to the collective cage by flowing down the game ball received in the reception opening (for example, the start opening) in the right hit game area 2540 downward) Is provided. However, this discharge passage is also formed by using at least part of the space secured between the stepped portion 3315 and the front side accessory unit 3200, and wastes the space in the depth direction. Not like that.

  FIG. 100 is a view for explaining the attachment position of the right guide path 3250 to the back box 3310. FIG. 101 is a transparent perspective view showing the shape of the right guide path 3250. As shown in FIG. 101, a rib portion 3251 is formed inside the right guiding path 3250, as shown in FIG. 101, and the passing speed of the game ball flowing down the right guiding path 3250 can be reduced. It is like that.

[5-9c-2. LCD drive unit]
Next, the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97, 98 and FIGS. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400. FIG. 103A is a front view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 103B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA. 104A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 104B is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit excluding the liquid crystal decorative member. FIG. 105 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal driving unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the uppermost position, and FIG. 105 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA. FIG. 106A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the uppermost position, and FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit excluding the liquid crystal decoration member. FIG. 107A is a front view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 107B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA. FIG. 108A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position. FIG. 109A is a front view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 109B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA. FIG. 110A is a perspective view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600 in the present embodiment includes the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and can be moved independently in the vertical direction. Further, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 accommodates the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and includes a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for moving each liquid crystal display device.

  Further, as described above, a rectangular liquid crystal decorative member that is long in the horizontal direction is provided between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a normal state in which an effect accompanying movement of the liquid crystal display device is not executed. 3630 is arranged, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 can move up and down independently or in conjunction with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. As shown in FIG. 104, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 can conceal a gap or a frame portion generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620.

  The liquid crystal drive unit 3400 holds the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by the control of the peripheral control board 4140, and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. A lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 that allows the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 up and down by the control of the peripheral control board 4140, and the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 and A liquid crystal container 3480 that houses the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. Between the upper liquid crystal storage unit 3480a for storing the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 and the lower liquid crystal storage unit 3480b for storing the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 in the liquid crystal storage unit 3480, a rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit). An opening 3480c capable of facing the front decorative portion 3700a is formed.

  The upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 urges the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 that supports the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 having a large weight in the assembled state of the game board 5 as the drive mechanism. Thus, an urging member 3412 for assisting the upward movement of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a mechanism for moving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 are provided.

  In the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410, guide rods 3413 having a length slightly shorter than the height of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 are arranged vertically on both sides of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. The guide rod 3413 is inserted into a bearing portion 3414 formed at two locations on the left and right sides of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411.

  As will be described later, at both ends of the lower side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, plate-like members 3450 provided in the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440, which are different members, are disposed downward. When pressed, a pressing portion 3418 is formed that moves the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided on the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 side upward alone.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 will be described. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 is attached to a motor housing portion 3485 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal housing portion 3480a of the liquid crystal housing portion 3480, and a spur gear-like upper liquid crystal driving gear 3420 is attached to the rotation shaft. ing. The upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421 has a large diameter spur gear-shaped large diameter transmission gear 3421a meshing with the upper liquid crystal drive gear 3420 and a small diameter spur gear-shaped small diameter transmission gear 3421b that rotates integrally with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a. Is provided. Further, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3422 that meshes with the small-diameter transmission gear 3421b of the upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421, and a spur gear-like elevating drive gear 3423 that meshes with the transmission gear 3422 are provided. The elevating drive gear 3423 meshes with a rack gear 3416 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411, and moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by the rotation of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415. In addition, a drive shaft disposed on the back side of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is coupled to the lift drive gear 3423, and a lift drive gear 3423 disposed on the left side in front view is coupled to the drive shaft. The elevating drive gear 3423 can move the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down by engaging with a rack gear 3416 formed on the left side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 to apply a driving force of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415. .

  The lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 urges the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 that supports the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 having a large weight in the assembled state of the game board 5 as the drive mechanism. Accordingly, a biasing member 3442 for assisting the upward movement of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and a mechanism for moving the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down by the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 are provided. In the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440, guide shafts 3443 having substantially the same length as the height of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are arranged on both sides of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 3443 is inserted into bearing portions 3444 formed at two upper and lower positions on the left and right sides of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441, respectively.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 will be described. The lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 is attached to a motor housing 3486 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal housing 3480b in front of the liquid crystal housing 3480, and a lower liquid crystal drive gear with a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft. Yes. In addition, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear meshing with the lower liquid-crystal drive gear and a small-diameter spur gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear rotating together with the large-diameter transmission gear are provided. Further, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear that meshes with a small-diameter transmission gear of the lower liquid crystal drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear that meshes with the transmission gear. The elevating drive gear meshes with a rack gear 3446 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441, and moves the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down by the rotation of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445. The elevating drive gear is connected to a drive shaft arranged on the back side of the lower liquid crystal display device, and the elevating drive gear arranged on the left side of the front view is connected to the drive shaft. The elevating drive gear meshes with a rack gear 3446 formed on the left side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 so as to apply the driving force of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down.

  By the way, in a general drive motor, a static torque acts in a state where a coil is not excited. This static torque is referred to as detent torque. When the detent torque is large, even if an attempt is made to directly rotate the rotating shaft of the drive motor, a force against this becomes large and rotation is difficult. That is, this detent torque cooperates with each urging force by the urging members 3412 and 3442 when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and no power is supplied to the drive motors 3415 and 3445. Thus, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 function to resist the force of moving downward due to their own weight.

  At this time, the combined value of the detent torque of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the urging force of the urging member 3412 (the directional component acting in the opposite direction to the own weight) rather than the downward force due to the own weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the urging member 3412 are provided so that the combined value of the forces becomes larger or substantially the same. Similarly, the combined value of the detent torque of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the urging force of the urging member 3442 (acts in the opposite direction to the own weight) rather than the downward force due to the own weight of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. The lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the urging member 3442 are provided so that the combined value of the directional component forces) is larger or substantially the same. Such a force relationship is established regardless of the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the movable range even if a change occurs in the magnitude of the urging force by the urging member. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a principle, the upper liquid crystal display device having a relatively large weight can be obtained without applying driving force by the driving motors 3415 and 3445. A structure in which 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can be held at appropriate positions is employed.

  However, in the state where the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 is tilted (flat state where the liquid crystal display surface faces upward or downward), the force due to the weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 acts. No longer. At this time, even if the urging force by the urging member 3412 changes, the urging force by the urging member 3412 is larger than the detent torque regardless of the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 in the movable range. As shown, an upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and an urging member 3412 are provided. Similarly, even if the magnitude of the urging force by the urging member 3442 changes, the urging force by the urging member 3442 is greater than the detent torque regardless of the position where the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is in the movable range. Is provided with a lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and an urging member 3442. As a result, in a state where the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 is tilted (flat state where the liquid crystal display surface faces upward or downward), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 reach the upper end in the movable range. Moves upward.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 3600 (here, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) has a force to stay in place when it is in a stationary state. "A", the force applied to the biasing member toward the first position (here, the uppermost part in the movable region of the liquid crystal display device 3600) is "B", and the force due to the weight of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is When the force of the directional component (downward here) against “B” is “C”, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is in the second position opposite to the first position (here, the liquid crystal display device). In the tendency that “B” increases as it approaches the lowermost part of the movable region of 3600, even if it is located anywhere in the movable range from the first position to the second position, “A <B Is the relationship In spite of standing, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, “A> B−C” regardless of where the pachinko machine 1 is located in the movable range from the first position to the second position. It is provided so that the relationship is established.

  According to such a configuration, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be maintained in a stationary state at any position within the movable range without necessarily receiving the driving force from the driving source. That is, in this case, regardless of the weight of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 360 can be kept stationary for a relatively long time at a plurality of positions in the movable range. Suppression of the decline in the amusement entertainment will be expected through high performance design.

  However, in order to allow such a design with a high degree of freedom, it is important that the urging force of the urging member is not greatly deteriorated. In this respect, according to the above configuration, until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, it is arranged (for example, flatly placed) so that its own weight does not act on the urging force of the urging member. Due to the relationship of A <B, the effect moving body can automatically move to the first position and can automatically rest the urging function by the urging member. Thereby, until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, the deterioration of the urging function is suppressed, and it is possible to provide a game based on the above-described design with a high degree of freedom. become.

  The detent torque can be changed depending on the gear ratio between the drive source motor that moves the liquid crystal display device and the gear that meshes with it. For example, when the motor rotates three times, the ratio of the torque (= detent torque) is tripled when the gear ratio is such that the meshing gear rotates once. In this embodiment, since the weight of the liquid crystal display device is large, the detent torque is relatively large because the gear ratio is high.

  Only when the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 are at positions where the urging force by the urging member is maximized through such detent torque setting change or urging force setting change by the urging member, the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620, 3620 may be moved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, a rotatable rotating member 3631 is provided at the center of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, and a driving force is supplied from a motor (not shown) through an endless belt provided on the back side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. The effect that the rotating member 3631 rotates by executing is executed. In addition, a guide portion 3630a that extends downward from the outside of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is integrally formed at the left and right ends of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 as viewed from the front. A biasing member (spring) for biasing is connected. The guide portion 3630a can move up and down between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide rod 3413. In addition, a rack gear 3630b is formed inside the guide portion 3630a, and meshes with a transmission gear 3451 described later and can move in conjunction with the plate-like member 3450.

  Further, inside the lower liquid crystal holding member 3440, a plate-like member 3450 is slidably disposed between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide portion 3630a of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. A guide slit 3450a (see FIGS. 103 and 104) is formed in the plate-like member 3450, and a rack gear 3450b is formed on the back side of the guide slit 3450a when viewed from the front.

  A transmission gear 3451 is disposed in the guide slit 3450a formed in the plate-like member 3450, and the rack gear 3450b of the plate-like member 3450 and the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a are arranged to mesh with each other. The plate-like member 3450 moves downward when the upper end of the plate-like member 3450 is pressed against the pressing portions 3418 formed at both lower ends of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411. At this time, the transmission gear 3451 engaged with the rack gear 3450b of the plate-like member 3450 rotates, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a, so that the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves upward. Thus, in the range where the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is in contact with the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the displacement amount of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is larger than the displacement amount of the upper liquid crystal drive unit, That is, it can be operated at high speed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable accessory (torso driving accessory 3700) disposed on the back of the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described later, but the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 starts. By being done, it is provided so that it can be visually recognized from the player side. Moreover, when the effect space is generated after the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is completed, the display space is provided so as to be movable to the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 through the effect space.

  However, if such large-scale large-scale and complicated movable effects (specific movable effects) are to be realized, it takes time for such a plurality of movable bodies to move in order (switching), and the game entertainment is reversed. It is feared that it will drop. For example, even if the movable accessory (trunk driving accessory 3700) arranged on the back of the liquid crystal display device 3600 becomes visible from the player side when the liquid crystal display device starts to move, It is not possible to move forward until the display space is generated after the movement of the display device is completed. In addition, even if the movement of the liquid crystal display device is started, as long as the movement distance is not sufficient, the entire surface of the movable accessory (torso driving accessory 3700) cannot be visually recognized in the first place.

  As described above, the liquid crystal decoration member (specific moving body) 3630 has the lower portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) and the lower liquid crystal display at the initial position (specific position). Since the upper portion of the device 3620 (the region including at least the upper frame portion of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is disposed, the boundary between the two liquid crystal display devices can be hidden without a sense of incongruity.

  In this state, when a specific movable effect using the movable accessory (fuselage driving accessory 3700) arranged on the back of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is executed, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 When the liquid crystal display device 3620 moves in a direction away from each other, an effect space of a movable accessory (torso driving accessory 3700) is generated.

  At this time, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 also includes a lower part of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (a region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) and a part of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 in front view as the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 moves. From the overlapped state, it moves in a direction away from the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (downward direction). However, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 has the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 itself as long as it is within the range in which the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 presses the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. The liquid crystal display device 3610 moves in this direction at a higher speed than the moving speed in the direction away from the liquid crystal display device 3610.

  According to the movement of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start to move away from each other, the movable accessory (rear end) of the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is used. The production space of the decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) can be generated relatively quickly, and as a result, when a large and large movable production (specific movable production) is realized, these movable bodies It is avoided that it takes time to move (switch) in order. Also, the surface of the movable accessory (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit)) behind them relatively early after the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start moving away from each other. The entire side can be exposed.

  As a result of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moving away from each other, when the pressing portion 3418 does not come into contact with the plate-like member 3450, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 itself becomes the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 It will move in the form of being brought along with this movement. In this way, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is configured such that the moving speed changes stepwise in accordance with the progress (movement distance) of the effect. In the present embodiment, the range in which the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves at high speed can be adjusted by adjusting the length of the plate-like member 3450.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved by the same displacement amount in the same direction or in the same manner in accordance with the effect in the liquid crystal display device 3600. A movable effect such as vibration can be performed. In this case, however, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be misaligned or may be rebounded due to physical interference between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. There is a concern that an unintended gap may be generated between 3620. That is, in this case, since the rear end decoration unit 3700 secretly provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 becomes dew, the game entertainment may be lowered. However, on the other hand, if such a problem is concerned and an excessive restriction is imposed on the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided with a drive mechanism to make it movable. There is a concern that the game will not be fully utilized.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Moreover, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 has the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display as long as the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal driving unit 3410 is within the range where the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 is pressed. Since it is provided so as to maintain a position straddling the device 3620, even if an unintended gap is generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, this is preferably concealed. Will be able to. As a result, it becomes possible to more actively execute a collaborative effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and thereby, a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is overlapped with the movable decoration part 3710 in front view so that the movable decoration part 3710 is difficult to see from the player side. The first effect state that is positioned and the second effect that the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is at least displaced from the position that is positioned when it is in the first effect state so that the movable decoration portion 3710 is easily visible from the player side. And a plurality of movable objects so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is difficult to see from the player side despite the fact that the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is displaced from the position where the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is in the first production state. At least one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 (here, both) is displaced together with the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. A third effect state may appear to be.

  In this case, the first production state and the third production state are generated, thereby causing the player to misunderstand that “the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is merely a movable production that only displaces”. Later, it is possible to generate the second performance state. That is, in this case, the movable decoration portion 3710 can be made to appear so as to cover the above-mentioned recognition on the player side (only a movable effect that only displaces the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is performed). It is expected that a surprise feeling will be given to the movable performance to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration as the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself is not concerned so much that an unintended gap is generated between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. The movement can be actively excited by the movement. For example, the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is desirably moved (vibrated or the like) in accordance with the movement of the effect image appearing in the display area.

  However, if the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) simply moves (vibrates), the effect image in the display area simply moves (vibrates) or the liquid crystal. It can be assumed that it is difficult for the player side to grasp whether the display device 3600 is actually moving (vibrating). Therefore, when moving (vibrating) the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) according to the effect image in the display area, not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 It is desirable that the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided on the front side is also moved (vibrated) in accordance with this. Accordingly, the movable decoration portion 3710 can be hidden, and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 3600 moves, so that not only the effect image in the display area but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself. It becomes possible to make it easier to realize that is moving.

  Further, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 makes the movable decoration portion 3710 easy to see from the player side, even if the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 does not move, the moving direction of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (upper It is provided so as to move in the opposite direction (direction having the component) and contribute to the enlargement of the opening. Accordingly, a relatively large movable decorative portion 3710 (opening portion) can be made to appear while suppressing the movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be used to achieve such an object. It is suppressed that the space on the rear side having no margin is pressed.

  As will be described later, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided such that at least a part of the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portions) of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is not exposed, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is provided. Also, when the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves, the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portions) are provided so as to move together at a position where they are hidden. Further, the thickness of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is reduced to such an extent that another thick movable body (movable decoration portion 3710) can be advanced on the front side thereof.

  When one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves so that the movable decorative portion 3710 appears, at least a part of the frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 Exposed to dew. Therefore, a darkening effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 before the frame portion becomes dewed so that it is difficult to notice the presence of the frame portion, thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest. desirable. At this time, if an effect is to be performed, it is difficult to notice the presence of the frame portion by performing an effect image (lightning light etc.) such that the black portion due to darkness occupies more than half of the area of the display area. Is desirable.

  In the third effect state, both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move to conceal the movable ornament portion 3710 on the rear side. 3710 is arranged behind either the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and when only the liquid crystal display device on the arranged side is moved, the movable decorative portion on the rear side thereof The presence of the movable decorative portion 3710 may be concealed by moving the 3710 so as to follow this. However, in this case, it is necessary to provide a movable region of the movable decorative portion 3710 on the back side of the liquid crystal display device.

  According to such a configuration, the secrecy of the movable decorative portion 3710 is maintained by special control such as moving the movable decorative portion 3710 without performing an effect using the movable decorative portion 3710. Therefore, it becomes extremely difficult for the player side to predict that the movable decorative portion 3710 exists on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. In this case, when the liquid crystal display device on the side where the movable decorative portion 3710 is arranged is moved, an effect pattern that does not move the movable decorative portion 3710 is prepared. It seems that there are cases where the movable decorative portion 3710 exists and does not exist on the back side of the player, and the player's interest can be attracted and the operation can be improved.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 has the first production state and the third production within a variation period when the symbol variation is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination when a specific performance condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to perform effect control that occurs in the order of the effect state and the second effect state. That is, in this case, after the player has misunderstood the player that the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is merely movable, the first effect state and the third effect state are the second effect state. A production state can be generated. Accordingly, the movable decoration portion 3710 can be made to appear so as to overturn the above-mentioned recognition on the player side (only a movable effect that only displaces the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is performed). It is expected that a sense of surprise will be given to the production to improve the game entertainment.

  Even when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) moves, the movable decorative portion 3710 disposed on the rear side thereof by the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 does not necessarily appear. In order to achieve the object, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not necessarily have to be moved back and forth or deformed.

  As described above, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 operates in conjunction with the movement of the liquid crystal display device, so that the accessory placed on the back side of the liquid crystal display device can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity. It should be noted that the accessory placed on the back side after the liquid crystal display device is moved may be made visible to the player without moving to the front side, or a display body such as a liquid crystal display device is arranged instead of the accessory. So that the player can visually recognize it. Further, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 does not need to be disposed so as to overlap the boundary between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and may operate according to the movement of the liquid crystal display device.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 (the connecting accessory) moves, a large and complicated movable effect is performed by performing an operation that allows a predetermined effect on the rear side to be recognized as quickly as possible. When realizing the above, it is possible to suppress the time required for the switching.

[5-9c-3. Rear accessory unit (fuselage drive unit)]
Subsequently, when a specific movable effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination despite being arranged behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, the decorative portion ( A rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving unit) that produces an effect by moving the accessory) will be described. First, the structure of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be mainly described. FIG. 112 (a) is a front view of the rear end decoration unit 3700, and FIG. 112 (b) is a rear view. FIGS. 113A and 113B are perspective views of the rear end decoration unit 3700, where FIG. 113A shows an initial state, and FIG. 113B shows a state where the movable decoration portion 3710 has advanced. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the rear end decoration unit 3700 is visible due to the movement of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 115A is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear end decoration portion 3708 disposed so as to be hidden behind the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is separated from the rear end decoration unit 3700. It is a figure and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the state which isolate | separated the rear end decoration part 3708 from the back surface side. 113 and 115, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is shown in a state where drive shafts 3734L and R, which will be described later, are omitted for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the rear decoration unit 3700 is arranged such that the movable decoration part 3710 on the front face thereof faces the opening 3480c formed in the liquid crystal storage part 3480, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is arranged. When at least one of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves to the side away from the other, the player can visually recognize from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 through the opening 3480c. It has become.

  In order to make the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 visible, only the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 may be moved upward, or only the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is moved downward. Alternatively, both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be moved away from each other.

  As a result of the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600, when a predetermined separation distance is created between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be advanced through the space therebetween. become able to. Further, as described later, when the movable decorative portion 3710 advances to a predetermined position, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be separated and deformed.

  As shown in FIGS. 112, 113, and 115, a rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment includes a base portion 3701 that is provided on the rear side in a front view, and a front view. The movable member group X which is disposed on the upper side of the front surface of the base portion 3701 and can be dynamically positioned, and is disposed on the lower side of the front surface of the base portion 3701 in a front view and is statically positioned. The non-movable member group Y which can be comprised.

  The base portion 3701 is provided with game board attachment portions 3702 on both upper and lower sides thereof, and the rear end decoration unit 3700 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5 (the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400) by the game board attachment portions 3702. The liquid crystal container 3480 is attached to the back surface side.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 115, an opening is formed in the base portion 3701, and a rear end decoration portion 3708 is attached so as to close the opening. By attaching the rear end decoration portion 3708, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the rear end decoration portion 3708 is provided so as to be hidden behind the movable decoration portion 3710 from the gap when the movable decoration portion 3710 moves forward. Becomes visible from the player side.

  The movable member group X is roughly divided into a movable decorative portion 3710 with a predetermined decoration in front view, and a support drive that supports the movable decorative portion 3710 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (depth direction). As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), both of these are portions that can move in the front-rear direction.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment includes an upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, a lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, an upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, and a lower right movable decorative portion 3710d. Since the liquid crystal display device 3600 is in the initial state of being arranged behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, a specific decoration (in this case, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is generated according to the positional relationship thereof. ing. Therefore, according to the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment, the time when the player can visually recognize from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 via the opening 3480c. Then, a specific decoration has already been created by the positional relationship between the plurality of movable decoration portions 3710a to 3710d.

  However, as will be described later, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment generates a specific decoration (in this case, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs) after having advanced to a predetermined position as described above. The movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d are separated from each other, and the specific decoration is once broken, and further, the decoration is not positioned so that any decoration appears. Thereafter, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c are different from the case where a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is created. And by positioning the lower right movable decoration portion 3710d, it is possible to produce an effect that newly creates one decoration different from the specific decoration. That is, in this case, it is possible to keep it secret until a new decoration is newly created, and it is possible to maintain the game entertainment by having a specific decoration appear from the time of appearance.

  In addition, the support driving unit 3740 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 includes a left support driving unit 3740L that is a part that supports the upper left movable decorative unit 3710a and the lower left movable decorative unit 3710b of the movable decorative unit 3710 in a movable manner. A right support driving portion 3740R, which is a portion that movably supports the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d of the movable decorative portion 3710, is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the left support drive unit 3740L is provided with a combined drive motor 3730a for operating the upper left movable decoration unit 3710a and the lower left movable decoration unit 3710b, and similarly, the right support drive unit 3740R. Is provided with a combined drive motor 3730b for operating the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d.

  In addition, each unitary drive motor 3730 is disposed outside the movable decoration portion 3710, and in a state where the movable decoration portion 3710 is not operating in a state where the rear end decoration unit 3700 is attached to the game board 5, As shown in FIG. 114, the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 is positioned so as to be concealed by a rear standing wall 3312 disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal driving unit 3400.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), a guide rod 3715 is attached to the upper side of the base portion 3701 in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, a rod insertion part 3741L is provided at the upper part of the left support drive part 3740L, and this rod insertion part 3741L is slidably inserted into the guide rod 3715. Similarly, a rod insertion part 3741R is provided at the upper part of the right support drive part 3740R, and this rod insertion part 3741R is slidably inserted into the guide rod 3715.

  That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the left and right movements in the front view of the rod insertion portion 3741L inserted through the guide rod 3715 cause the upper left movable decoration portion 3710a and the lower left movable decoration portion 3710b. The movement of the first left arm portion 3705L that moves in the depth direction is converted into the movement of the first left arm portion 3705L, and the movement in the left-right direction in the front view of the rod insertion portion 3741R inserted through the guide rod 3715 corresponds to the upper right movable decoration portion 3710c and the lower right portion. The movable decorative portion 3710d is converted into a movement of the first right arm portion 3705R that moves the movable decorative portion 3710d in the depth direction.

  With the above configuration, when the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X are moved in the central direction that is closer to each other by the forward drive motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y, FIG. As shown, the movable fulcrum part 3706 of the movable decorative part 3710 moves forward, and the whole moves forward. Conversely, when the forward drive motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y moves the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X in the outward direction that is away from each other, the movable decorative portion 3710 is provided. The movable fulcrum portion 3706 moves backward and the whole moves backward.

  However, as will be described later, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, another independent movement independent of the movement in the front-rear direction of the movable decoration portion 3710 according to the driving force applied by the forward drive motor 3720 is provided. As a motion, the movable decorative portion 3710 can move in the front-rear direction according to the driving force applied by the combined drive motor 3730 (the left combined drive motor 3730a and the right combined drive motor 3730b). ing.

  Further, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawing, the electric wiring arranged with bending on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is drawn into the base 3701, This electric wiring is configured to be supplied to the movable decorative portion 3710 through the right support drive unit 3740R and the left support drive unit 3740L. The electric wiring can extend (extend and contract) as much as it is bent and arranged so that the movable decorative portion 3710 remains electrically connected to the electric wiring as described later. The liquid crystal display device 3600 can be moved to the front side.

  That is, as will be described later, the rear end decoration unit 3700 can emit light in a state where the movable decoration portion 3710 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decoration portion 3710 of the decoration unit 3700 is located in a space in front of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, whereas its drive mechanism (base portion 3701, right support drive portion 3740R, left support) The drive unit 3740L and the like are positioned in such a way that at least the space behind the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is used, and the rear drive mechanism unit is drawn from the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decorative portion 3710 can emit light through the electric wiring arranged in the shape.

  According to such a configuration, the movable decoration portion 3710 can be moved or decorated by light emission using the drive mechanism portion or electrical wiring that is difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the liquid crystal display device 3600. become. In other words, in designing the effect for the effect, the demand for “contributing to the realization of difficulty in visual recognition of the drive mechanism and the electrical wiring” is suppressed. Through the improvement of the degree of freedom in design, it can be expected to realize an effect that can suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In particular, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the drive mechanism unit and the electric wiring arranged in the form drawn from the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are both movable decoration units that move in the depth direction. When the 3710 is viewed from the front, it can be accommodated in the projection plane. Therefore, when designing the effect for the production, "contribute to the realization of difficulty in visual recognition of the drive mechanism and electric wiring". Is no longer required.

  Next, an operation mode of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. 116 is an initial state, FIG. 117 is a state in which the movable decorative portion is advanced, FIG. 117 is a state in which the left and right movable decorative portions are rotated around the outer end, and FIG. 118 is a combination of the left and right movable decorative portions at the front. It is a figure which shows a state. 116 to 119 are (a) a top view, (b) a front view, and (c) a perspective view. 116 to 119, for convenience of explanation, the cover portion of the base portion 3701, the rear end decoration portion 3708, the first left arm portion 3705L, the first right arm portion 3705R, and the movable decoration portion 3710 is omitted. In this state, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is shown.

  A drive gear 3720a is inserted into the rotation shaft of the forward drive motor 3720 that moves the movable decorative portion 3710 forward. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), the drive gear 3725 is geared downward. The first rack gear 3721 that contributes to the sliding operation of the rod insertion portion 3741L and the second rack gear 3722 that is geared upward and contributes to the sliding operation of the rod insertion portion 3741R. Yes.

  According to such a configuration, when the forward drive motor 3720 is driven (rotated clockwise) in the states shown in FIGS. 116A to 116C, the rod insertion portion 3741L is in the right direction, and the rod insertion portion 3741R is Each slides to the left. That is, by moving in the central direction, which is a direction approaching each other, the state shown in FIGS. 117A to 117C is shifted through the movement of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R. Thus, the movable fulcrum portion 3706 of the movable decorative portion 3710 moves forward, and the whole moves forward.

  Conversely, in the state shown in FIGS. 117A to 117C, when the forward drive motor 3720 is reversely driven (rotated counterclockwise), the rod insertion portion 3741L is in the left direction and the rod insertion portion 3741R is in the right direction. Each comes to slide. That is, by moving in the outward direction that is the direction away from each other in this way, the state moves to the state shown in FIGS. 116A to 116C through the movement of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R. Thus, the movable fulcrum part 3706 of the movable decorative part 3710 moves backward and the whole moves backward.

  As described above, the drive gear 3725 inserted in the forward drive motor 3720 is arranged in parallel and meshes with the first rack gear 3721 geared downward and the second rack gear 3722 geared upward. By doing so, the second rack gear 3722 can be moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first rack gear 3721 moves.

  However, in the gaming machine, it is expected that the effect by the movable accessory is easy to attract the player's eyes and is expected to enhance the interest. However, the movable range of the accessory in the gaming machine is easy to predict by the player, and the There is concern about the decline.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the front-rear direction also by another movement (union driving motor 3730) independent of the movement by the forward drive motor 3720. Thus, it is possible to realize the movement of an accessory that exceeds the player's expectations.

  That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the support drive units 3740L and R that support the movable decoration unit 3710 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (depth direction) are provided from the forward drive motor 3720. In addition to the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R (see FIG. 115) for transmitting the driving force, as shown in FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (c), from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b, Drive shafts 3734L and R for transmitting the drive force are provided.

  Here, the drive shafts 3734L and R are provided on the rear side of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R (see FIG. 115), and one end side thereof is the combined drive motor 3730a, b. Are formed as gear portions 3733L and R that are meshed with appropriate gears that rotate by being driven, and the other end side thereof is linked to a drive mechanism provided inside the movable decorative portion 3710. , R are formed as screw gears (worms) 3735L, R meshing with each other.

  Inside the movable decoration portion 3710, there are provided two drive mechanisms as drive mechanisms linked to the gear portions 3736L, R. The gear portions 3736L, R are first connected to the first drive mechanism. It functions to apply a predetermined amount (predetermined amount of rotation) of driving force. When a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation amount) of driving force is applied to the first system drive mechanism, the movement of the first system drive mechanism is locked, and this locked state When a driving force is further applied in step 2, the driving force is applied to the second-system driving mechanism.

  In the rear-end ornament unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the movable ornament in the state shown in FIGS. 117A to 117C is used as the first-system drive mechanism based on such a drive principle. A drive mechanism that deforms the portion 3710 to the state shown in FIGS. 118A to 118C is provided.

  More specifically, in the state shown in FIGS. 117A to 117C, when the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730 are driven, first, the gear portions 3736L and R are rotated by the drive shafts 3734L and R. By receiving the movement, each of them turns. Such movement (rotation) of the gear portions 3736L, R is transmitted to a drive mechanism provided inside the movable decorative portion 3710, and finally, the gear portions 3737L, R, 3738L, R, 3739L, and R are sequentially rotated.

  That is, in this case, when the three gear portions 3737L, 3738L, and 3739L are rotated, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b are directed upward (counterclockwise in front view) so that the inner left drive mechanism is exposed. Rotation) and downward (clockwise when viewed from the front) respectively, thereby shifting to the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c). Similarly, when the three gear portions 3737R, 3738R, and 3739R are rotated, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are directed upward (as viewed from the front). In the clockwise direction) and in the downward direction (counterclockwise in the front view), thereby shifting to the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c).

  Then, when the state is shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 118A to 118C, the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is locked. However, as described above, if the drive force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b is further applied in this locked state, the drive force is applied to the second drive mechanism. The movable decorative portion 3710 in the state shown in 118 (a) to (c) can be deformed to the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c).

  The details of the second system drive mechanism are omitted, but the gear portions 3736L and R rotate a different gear when the movement of the first system drive mechanism is locked. Thus, when a driving force is applied to the second-system driving mechanism in the movable decorative portion 3710, the state is changed to the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c). In this case, the upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d in the initial position face the player side. That is, the rear end decoration unit 3700 can be transformed into a completely different mode by combining decorative surfaces that are not visible to the player at the initial position.

  Conversely, in the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c), when the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730 are reversely driven, the state is changed to the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c). It becomes like this. 118 (a) to (c), the movement of the first drive mechanism is unlocked, and the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are further reversely driven. If it continues, it will come to further transfer to the state shown by FIG. 117 (a)-(c).

  According to such a configuration, when the state shown in FIGS. 117A to 117C is shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 118A to 118C, a specific decoration (here, Each of the movable decoration portions 3710a to 3710d that created the design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs is separated, and the specific decoration is once destroyed. Moreover, in the state shown in FIGS. 118A to 118C, each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d does not cause any decoration to appear, and the internal driving mechanism concealed by those cover portions is not used. A production situation is created as if the success or failure of the movable production failed.

  Then, in the states shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c), after the production situation is created as if the expectation to the jackpot is reduced, the states shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c). When moving to, each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d is positioned in a form that newly creates one decoration different from the specific decoration. In other words, in this case, since the prejudice that it is a character that forms a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance is overturned, a different decoration is newly created without returning to the specific decoration. It becomes possible to provide an effect production that exceeds.

  In this case, in order to improve the gaming interests, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is better when a new decoration is newly created than when it appears as a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance. It is desirable to increase the value.

  Moreover, according to the said structure, the movable decoration part 3710 moves to the front-back direction (depth direction) by the forward drive motor 3720 (state shown to Fig.116 (a)-(c), and Fig.117 (a)). ~ Movement in the front-rear direction (depth direction) by the combined drive motors 3730a, b separately from the front-rear direction movement using the movement between the states shown in (c) (Fig. 117 (a)) A structure capable of independently appearing the movement shown in the front-rear direction using the movement between the state shown in FIG. 119 (c) and the state shown in FIGS. Has been.

  That is, in this case, for example, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in a specific direction (for example, the forward direction) by the driving force from the combined driving motors 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion 3710 is driven by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. It becomes possible to displace itself in a direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, backward direction). That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 can continue to be displaced in a specific direction (for example, the front direction) from a limited production space to an extent that can be assumed. In addition, it is expected that the decrease in the entertainment interest will be suppressed through the realization of a large movable performance.

  More specifically, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment is provided so as to be displaceable in the depth direction, but only the distance to the glass plate 564 remains on the front side thereof. If it tries to exceed, it will collide with the glass plate 564. Therefore, from the player's side, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 moves to the front side, it is expected that the movable decorative portion 3710 is limited to that range, but by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. When the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the forward direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is displaced in the direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, the backward direction) by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. For example, it is possible to make it appear as if the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in the forward direction to an extent exceeding expectations by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b.

  In fact, in the pachinko machine 1, when the state shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to (c) is shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c), the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are used. The movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced forward by the driving force from the forward direction, and at the same time, the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is in a direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, the backward direction) by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. It is also displaced. As a result, a large effect production can be realized even in a limited production space.

  Also, in the example according to this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the side close to the player side is shown to move largely forward to the front side by deformation of itself, and is located behind the front side. The first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R, which are difficult to visually recognize, are secretly moved simultaneously to the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect effect as if the limit is exceeded in a limited production space while making it difficult for the player side to grasp the backward movement.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is provided with the liquid crystal display device under the relationships “A> B”, “A> C”, and “A <B + C”. When the distance (length) from the front surface of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the glass plate 564 is “A” when positioned at the rear side of the 3600 (the position shown in FIG. 84B), the combined drive motor When receiving the driving force from 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be displaced over a length of “B” at the maximum in the depth direction (front direction here) and receives the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. In this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 is provided to be displaceable over a length of “C” at the maximum in the depth direction (here, the front side direction).

  In this respect, when the peripheral control board 4140 moves the movable decoration portion 3710 based on the result of the big hit determination, the peripheral control board 4140 moves in the depth direction (here, the front side direction) of the movable decoration portion 3710 by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. And the total amount of the displacement amount in the depth direction (front direction in this case) of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 is “B + C” which is larger than “A” at the maximum. In the range in which the total value does not exceed “A” while the movable structure is realized, in the depth direction (here, the front side direction) of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. And control related to displacement in the depth direction (front direction in this case) by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. Re so that respectively perform.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of drive sources are used at the same time, a large movement that does not fit in the production space is allowed, and each drive source alone does not feel cramped by the production that fits in the production space. In the case of simultaneous driving, through the appropriate control of each driving amount, a dynamic movable effect that seems to exceed unprecedented limits in the effect space can be realized, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment It becomes like this.

  Note that the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment uses only the combined drive motor 3730a, b of the combined drive motors 3730a, 3b and the forward drive motor 3720 based on the result of the big hit determination, and the movable decorative portion 3710 is used. In the depth direction, and in the case where only the forward drive motor 3720 is used to cause the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the depth direction. Depending on which of these appears, the big hit Expectations obtained are different. At this time, when only the forward drive motor 3720 is used to cause the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the depth direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 extends over the maximum length “B” in the depth direction (front direction here). An effect pattern for displacing can appear.

  However, even when the operation in the depth direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 appears only using the united drive motors 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion extends over the maximum length “A” in the depth direction (the front direction in this case). An effect pattern for displacing 3710 may be allowed to appear.

  By making it possible to produce an effect using only one of the combined drive motors 3730a, 3b and the forward drive motor 3720, both the combined drive motors 3730a, 3730b and the forward drive motor 3720 are simultaneously driven. If it does, it will be possible to provide a thrilling feeling that it will not fit in the production space.

  That is, when only one of the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730a and the forward drive motor 3720 is used to displace the movable decorative portion 3710 in a specific direction (single movable effect), the movable effect has a scale that fits within a predetermined finite space. Will remain ("A> B", "A> C"). However, by providing such a single movable effect, “when the driving force is applied from both the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730a and the second forward drive motor 3720, they cannot fit within a predetermined finite space. The player can be reminded of the feeling that a large-scale movable performance exceeding the limit may appear (“A <B + C”).

  Then, in the case where the driving force is applied from both the combined driving motors 3730a and 3730a and the second forward driving motor 3720, a range that does not exceed a predetermined finite space (the total value is “A”). Within a range that does not exceed the control of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b, and the movable decorative portion by the driving force from the second forward drive motor 3720. The control relating to the displacement of the part 3710 in a specific direction is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to provide an interesting movable effect as if a predetermined finite space is still broken, and this can suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  By the way, in recent years, the display area of the effect display device has been increased, and the player side has come to touch such a large effect with a sense of manners. It is difficult to contribute to maintenance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the total area of the display area that can be viewed in front view (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and In the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, control is performed to deliberately reduce the area obtained by adding the display areas that can be viewed. According to such a configuration, in a state in which the total area of the display area is not reduced, it is possible to learn the feeling that a relatively large display effect is being performed. It will be possible to expect the maintenance of game entertainment when in a state.

  However, in this case, in a state where the total area of the display area that can be viewed in front view is reduced, it will make me feel that only a relatively small display effect can be performed, There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the total area of the display area that is visible in the front view is reduced, the total area of the display area is obtained using the space generated by the reduction. By moving the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 that does not appear when the value is relatively large to the front of the display area, the “effect by the movable accessory” described below is performed, so that it can be viewed in front view. The game entertainment when the total area of the display area to be reduced is suitably maintained.

  In addition, in order to obtain the above-described effects as the “effect by the movable accessory” described below, the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) reduces the display area that can be viewed by itself. Are required to move. In this way, the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself shows a movement to deliberately reduce the display area, so that the player can feel that only a relatively small display effect can be performed. Is expected.

[5-10. Production by movable accessories]
Next, the movable effects including effects by the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive unit) in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 to 129. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a state before execution of the movable effect. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device is moved and the player can visually recognize the body drive unit. 122 is a diagram showing a state of the body drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 121. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the movable decorative portion of the trunk drive unit has advanced. 124 is a diagram showing an aspect of the body drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 123. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a state where the movable decorative portion of the body drive unit is separated. 126 is a diagram showing an aspect of the body drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a state where the deformation of the movable decorative portion of the body drive unit is completed. 128 is a diagram showing an aspect of the body drive unit in the state shown in FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a state in which the combination of the front side accessory unit is combined with the movable decorative portion after the deformation is completed, and the combined effect is completed.

  Now, assuming that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the control related to the specific movable effect using the rear end decoration unit 3700 is executed. I do.

  However, in a normal state in which a specific movable effect is not performed, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 120, the rear end decoration unit 3700 has a liquid crystal display so that it is difficult for the player to grasp its presence. It is provided behind the display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the player looks in from the side or the upper side, the front side accessory unit 3200 (the face driving unit 3210). The shoulder driving unit 3220, the full burst driving unit (lower accessory) 3230, the right guiding path 3250, etc.) can be grasped, while the rear end decoration unit 3700 and the upper liquid crystal display device The driving mechanisms of the 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are structured such that the presence of the drive mechanism cannot be sensed by the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear standing wall 3312, or the like.

  That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a structure, the effect space is expanded in the depth direction and multiplexed by a plurality of ornaments arranged so as to be hidden in the depth direction. As a typical production, it is possible to realize a development that gradually turns the player's gaze in the depth direction, or it is huge and powerful that can not be achieved with just the production space in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 The player can enjoy the effect production without overlooking.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes control related to a specific movable effect using the rear decoration unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 121, at least one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is used. One is moved in a direction away from each other, and control is performed to reduce the total area of the display area that is visible in front view. Accordingly, the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear decoration unit 3700 is moved forward between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 using the space corresponding to the reduced total area of the display region. A production space that can move is created.

  When the production space is created in this way, the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 located on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be viewed from the player side. As a result, an effect of gradually directing the player's gaze in the depth direction is first developed. In this state, the driving force is still applied to the movable decorative portion 3710 (upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, lower right movable decorative portion 3710d) of the rear end ornament unit 3700. This is maintained in the state shown in FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (d).

  However, although the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are not yet applied with any driving force, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, The upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are arranged in a positional relationship that generates a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of a team to which a specific character belongs). As described above.

  The production space created in this way determines the size of the movable decorative portion 3710 itself moving to the front side, so that it is required to create a larger production space. However, on the other hand, since the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is reduced by an amount corresponding to the increase in the effect space, the display space moves to the front side through the effect space even though it is a small effect space. It is desired to achieve a large effect production with decorations.

  In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is provided with a structure capable of meeting such a request as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is larger than the thickness of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in front thereof. The thickness of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thickness is provided as a movable effect that opposes the player side.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the forward drive motor 3720 (rotates clockwise) in the state where the production space is created in this way, and as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the movable decorative portion 3710 This itself is moved forward. By moving the movable decorative portion 3710 itself to the front side in this way, the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed so as to be further hidden behind the movable decorative portion 3710 is slightly visually recognized from the player side. As a result, an effect that gradually turns the player's gaze in the depth direction is advanced second.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control to displace the movable decorative portion 3710 forward over the maximum length “B” when only the forward drive motor 3720 is used, so that the combined drive motors 3730a, 3730b, When the drive control using is further performed, a thrilling feeling that the limit of the production space is exceeded is provided.

  However, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not necessarily have to be displaced forward over the maximum “B” length, and the entire movable decorative portion 3710 is located in front of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. A specific movable effect can be realized as long as the forward drive motor 3720 is at least driven (right-turned) to the fully protruding position.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b in a state where the entire movable decorative portion 3710 is thus completely projected to the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are separated from each other by the upper liquid crystal. The display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned so as to straddle in front view.

  According to such a configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 that is an entity is as if it is divided between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 that can be displayed so that a specific effect image is straddled. While being able to be positioned, the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a front view, respectively, so that the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are located. Even in a state where the two are separated from each other, it is possible to realize a coordinated effect by the movable decoration unit 3710 that functions to connect them, or to let the player know that the coordinated effect is being performed. .

  125 and 126, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. They are also positioned so as to overlap each other visually.

  That is, in a period until the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is connected to the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the region on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Since the player operates in conjunction with each other or in the manner shown in FIG. 111, the movable region of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is allowed to operate as an accessory effect from the player side. It looks like a production space. Nevertheless, the movable decoration part 3710 moves to a space on the front side that has been unused so far and has not been recognized as a production space, as if to break such an acceptable production space. Thus, the positional relationship between the front and rear between the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is reversed. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that exceeds the assumption on the player side, such as “how much it moves toward the player side”.

  Further, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved to an unused area in this way, the positional relationship in the depth direction is difficult to grasp in front view, and this is not grasped by the player side as described above. Although there may be a concern that the operational effect is not sufficiently achieved, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. By making them overlap each other visually, these concerns can be suitably resolved.

  Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side so that most of the movable decorative portion 3710 overlaps with the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed at the back. Nevertheless, in the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves (deforms) in a manner that reduces the portion overlapping the rear end decorative portion 3708 in front view. As a result, the rear end decoration portion 3708 arranged so as to be hidden behind the movable decoration portion 3710 can be easily seen from the player side, and the player's gaze is gradually directed toward the depth direction. The third progress will be made.

  Further, in such a state, the movable decorations 3710a to 3710d that have created a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) are separated and the specific decoration is once destroyed. In addition to the fact that no decorations appear, the internal drive mechanism that was concealed by those cover parts is exposed, creating a production situation as if the success or failure of the movable production failed. As described above.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are continuously driven even after the production situation is generated as if the success or failure of the movable production failed. As shown in 128, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable are different from the case where a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is created. By positioning the decoration part 3710c and the lower right movable decoration part 3710d, one decoration (here, the body of the robot) different from the specific decoration is newly created.

  More specifically, the upper surface of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower surface of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d at the initial position face the player side. By doing so, one decoration (here, the body of the robot) different from the specific decoration is newly created.

  According to such a configuration, a decoration that cannot be visually recognized by the player at the initial position is combined with a completely different shape and a completely different decoration appears, thereby realizing an effect that exceeds the assumption of the player side. Will be able to. 84B shows the upper surface of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower surface of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d in the initial position. It is a part related to the thick part, and since it is designed to realize a movable production in such a part, it is a small effect space, but a large accessory due to a decoration moved to the front side through the production space Production can be realized. In fact, the robot body shown in FIG. 127 (a) is formed by arranging two thick portions of the movable decorative portion 3710, and the horizontal width thereof is the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal. It is larger than the vertical width of the space provided between the display devices 3620, and its area is also larger than the opening area of the space.

  When the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 is shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 is further moved forward by the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. It becomes. However, at this time, the movable decorative portion 3710 has already moved forward over the maximum length “B” when the forward drive motor 3720 is used, so when the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are used. Further forward movement over the maximum “C” length is not possible. Nevertheless, in order for the body of the robot to be formed, it is necessary to further move forward over the length of the maximum “C” when using the combined drive motors 3730a, 3b. Since the collision with the glass plate 564 is unavoidable, the forward drive motor 3720 has been driven to the extent that a specific movable effect cannot be realized from the player's side. , It will appear as if it is foretelling that a specific movable effect will not be realized.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can realize a large movable effect even in such a limited space by simultaneously driving the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the reverse drive of the forward drive motor 3720. I am doing so.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decoration portion 3710 overlaps when the rear end decoration portion 3708 disposed at the innermost position is in the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. The movable decorative portion 3710 is moved (deformed) so as to expose the portion that is positioned at the position that is difficult to visually recognize. Thereby, the portion of the rear end decoration portion 3708 disposed so as to be hidden behind the movable decoration portion 3710 is easily visible from the player side, and gradually increases in the depth direction. The fourth stage of an effect that causes the player to pay attention to the player.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the movable body decoration unit 3710 to make the robot body appear on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and then, as shown in FIG. 129, the face drive unit 3210 (the left face unit 3210a and the right The face portion 3210b) and the shoulder drive portion 3220 (the left arm portion 3220a and the right arm portion 3220b) are moved so as to approach the robot body portion so as to be positioned so as to form the face and shoulder of the robot, respectively. A specific movable effect that causes a large robot to appear in front of the apparatus 3600 is executed.

  After the appearance of the large robot in this way, the procedure for returning the face driving unit 3210, the shoulder driving unit 3220, and the movable decoration unit 3710 to the initial positions is the opposite of the appearance, and first the face driving The part 3210 and the shoulder drive part 3220 are moved away from the robot body part (movable decoration part 3710) and returned to the initial position. Thereafter, the movable decorative portion 3710 is changed from the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128 to the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the state shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, and the state shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. Then, the specific movable effect comes to an end by moving so that the effect space between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 disappears. .

  According to such a specific movable effect, the decoration (face driving unit 3210, shoulder driving unit 3220) disposed at the initial position in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear space of the liquid crystal display device 3600. One decoration (robot) is produced according to the mutual positional relationship in a state where all the decorations (movable decoration part 3710) arranged at the initial position are located in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600. In other words, in this case, the space on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 also contributes to the effect rendering realized on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, thereby contributing to the increase in size. A large-scale effect (including the thickness of the decoration that appears) that cannot be realized only with the members in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be realized in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The decoration (robot) that appears in this way is made thicker than the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In addition, after expanding the production space in the depth direction in this way, the front decorations (the face driving unit 3210 and the shoulder driving unit 3220) positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 Since at least one of the rear decoration object (movable decoration part 3710) located in the position moves in the depth direction and collaborates to perform a predetermined decoration effect (appearance of a robot), It becomes possible to realize a movable effect with a three-dimensional effect using movement in the depth direction, and it can be expected to suppress a decrease in amusement interest.

  Note that such movement in the depth direction only needs to have a component in the depth direction. For example, the movement in the diagonal direction moves toward each other, and when the two approach each other, the predetermined decoration effect is produced in cooperation. May be performed.

  Further, in such a specific movable effect, a movable decorative portion 3710 arranged so as to be hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 is prepared, and the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal display device 3600 are moved. The movable decoration part 3710 jumps out to a region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 so that a specific decoration shape (body part) is exposed. Therefore, even in the case where the space for providing the acting item is insufficient in the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the decorative object (the face driving unit 3210 (the left face part 3210a and the right face) is located in the front side area. The movable decorative portion 3710 having a shape (specific decorative shape) different from the portion 3210b) and the shoulder drive portion 3220 (the left arm portion 3220a and the right arm portion 3220b) is suddenly made to appear and disappear from the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. As a result, it is possible to expect a reduction in the gaming interests by a novel effect that cannot be recalled by such a player.

  In addition, as a condition (predetermined effect condition) in which such a specific movable effect appears, for example, a specific variation pattern is selected in the special symbol variation pattern setting process, or the execution of the jackpot game is started. It is possible to adopt conditions such as. Here, if the production condition is that a specific variation pattern has been selected, a specific movable production is started and ended after the special symbol variation starts and ends. In the case where the performance condition is that the execution of the jackpot game is started, a specific movable effect is started and ended during the execution period of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the large-scale effect rendering realized in this way may cover the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  Further, the decorations (left face part 3210a, right face part 3210b, left arm part 3220a, right arm part 3220b of the front accessory unit 3200) arranged in the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are not necessarily the whole. Need not be on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and at least a part of the specific portion is on the front side of the display surface, and the decoration that appears by the specific portion and the movable decorative portion 3710 is the liquid crystal display device 3600 If it appears on the front side of the display surface, a large scale (including the thickness of the decoration that appears) that cannot be realized with only the members in the space on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 It can be realized in the front space of the display device 3600.

  Further, the decorative objects (left face part 3210a, right face part 3210b, left arm part 3220a, right arm part 3220b of the front side accessory unit 3200) disposed in the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are not driven. Even in the state (initial position), it suffices if at least a part is in front of the display surface.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. With respect to the liquid crystal display device 3600, the movable decorative portion 3710 is viewed from the front. In such a structure, it is possible to change from a state that is difficult to visually recognize to a state that is easily visible in front view. And when the movable decoration part 3710 is made in a state where it is easy to visually recognize in front view, a specific accessory effect using the movable decoration part 3710 that has been difficult to visually recognize until then and a decoration provided separately from this is provided. Since it was made possible to perform, it becomes possible to realize a powerful effect production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  Further, according to the specific movable effect described above, the specific part (movable decorative portion 3710) of the rear end decoration unit 3700 disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is entirely disposed in the liquid crystal display device 3600. When the movable decorative portion 3710 is in a state of being located behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the initial state shown in FIG. 120), the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decoration unit 3710 and the liquid crystal display device 3600 are both in front view when the unit 3710 is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and in the state of performing the effect (the effect state shown in FIG. 129). They are positioned so as to overlap each other.

  In other words, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 concealed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to conceal at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600, thereby concealing the player. The accessory effect is performed in cooperation with other decorations (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220) at a position as if gazing away. Thus, after the player's gaze is moved from the liquid crystal display device 3600 that was in the position of hiding the movable decoration portion 3710 to the movable decoration portion 3710 in the position of hiding the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 3600 The player will be able to enjoy the powerful and powerful performances that cannot be realized with the frontal production space alone.

  As described above, since the movable decoration unit 3710 hides at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to hide the player's gaze, even during the period during which the specific movable effect is performed. The liquid crystal display device 3600 in which the total area of the display area that can be viewed in the front view is reduced without considering the possibility that the player overlooks the effect production is positive. To be able to do that. In addition, as a display effect during the period in which such a specific movable effect is performed, an effect (a dark display or a display that makes thunder light run) that enhances the interest when the accessory effect is performed by the movable decoration unit 3710 appears. Something like this is desirable. Also, at this time, if one linked display effect that spans the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is performed, the movable decorative portion 3710 breaks down the one display effect from the rear side thereof. It is possible to provide a novel effect as if it has moved to the front side.

  However, it is not always possible to take a gaze from the liquid crystal display device 3600 simply by placing an ornament on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. For example, even if the face driving unit 3210 and the shoulder driving unit 3220 are used as such decorations, as described above, these decorations are displayed on the side of the player even when a specific movable effect is not performed. Since the presence can be easily grasped by looking from above or from above (see FIG. 120B), such a known ornament is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Even if it is positioned, it is hard to say that the effect is sufficient to attract the player's attention.

  In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 when positioned behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 as described above. The structure is concealed by different members (rear standing wall 3312 and liquid crystal decoration member 3630), and the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 having such high secrecy is provided. By moving to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, it is expected that the player's gaze is surely taken away from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, after the gaze is taken away by such a movable decorative portion 3710 (see FIG. 125), the movable decorative portion 3710 has been used up to that point (see FIGS. 121 and 123). By creating a completely different type of decoration (robot body) with a different decorative surface than the reference), it is possible to further gather the player's gaze (see FIG. 127). Then, after this, the known decorations (the face driving unit 3210 and the shoulder driving unit 3220) approach the movable decoration unit 3710 where the player's attention is gathered so that one decoration (robot) is created. From the appearance of the movable decoration portion 3710 to the time when one decoration (robot) is created, it is possible to collect and enjoy the player's gaze.

  The liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620. However, the rear decoration unit 3700 includes the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. What is necessary is just to be arrange | positioned in the at least one back side of the liquid crystal display device 3620. FIG. However, if a display effect appears in both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a state where the movable decorative portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, It is desirable that the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned so as to overlap both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a front view in order to more reliably take a gaze from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  At this time, as for one decoration (robot) produced by the movable decoration part 3710 and the known decorations (face driving part 3210, shoulder driving part 3220), any of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is used. It is desirable to make it appear with a larger area in front view than that in order to more reliably take gaze from the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  Further, the movable decoration portion 3710 (or one decoration (robot)) is positioned so as to straddle both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in this way, so that the upper liquid crystal display device Even when 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are separated from each other, the player side can easily recognize that a display effect linked with them is performed.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the movable decoration portion 3710 or one decoration (robot) positioned so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is caused to emit light. An effect in which the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 cooperate with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a separated state is to perform an effect in cooperation with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 It is more desirable to realize At this time, the movable decorative portion 3710 or a portion of the decoration (robot) that is positioned between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is in a separated state. The upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in FIG. It is more desirable that the light emitting portion itself be positioned across the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 which are in a separated state.

  In addition, as a cooperation effect realized by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in such a separated state and a decoration (movable decoration portion 3710) connecting them, for example, the upper liquid crystal display device It can be realized as an effect in which one decoration appears by the effect image displayed on 3610, the ornament (movable decoration part 3710) which is an entity, and the effect image displayed on the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. It is.

  In the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600, the movable decorative portion 3710, and the rear end decorative portion 3708, each of which is located in front of the rear end decorative portion 3708. The display device 3600 and the movable decorative portion 3710 are moved, and the movable decorative portion 3710 disposed so as to be hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 has a distance in the depth direction from the rear end decorative portion 3708. By popping out to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 so as to expand, the decorative shape of the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side. It becomes like this. In this way, after expanding the production space in the depth direction, as a multiple production by the movable decoration portion 3710 and the rear end decoration portion 3708 arranged so as to be hidden in the depth direction, the player gradually pays attention to the depth direction. It is now possible to appeal the degree of depth that has never existed in the past by realizing the production progress (first progress, second progress, third progress, fourth progress) , A decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. In addition, the effect using the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the front side extends in the depth direction not only in the region in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also in the region in the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of gaming.

  In the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the front decorations (face driving unit 3210, shoulder driving unit 3220) positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the liquid crystal display When a predetermined decoration effect (appearance of the robot) is performed with the rear decoration (movable decoration portion 3710) located behind the device 3600, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are present. Although the effect space can be visually recognized, other decorations provided in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the effect space to make it difficult to visually recognize the effect space.

  Further, in realizing the effect of moving the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 3600 does not necessarily need to be movable. For example, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 by moving so as to wrap around from the side of the liquid crystal display device 3600.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the drive mechanism (guide rod 3413, guide shaft 3443, etc.) of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) in the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 Then, a concealed part 3312 (attachment hole or the like) for attaching the front movable accessory unit 3200 is provided on the front side of the standing wall 3312 while concealing it by 3312 (while making it difficult for the player to see in front view). . According to such a configuration, the function of concealing the drive mechanism by the rear standing wall 3312 and the function of attaching the front movable accessory unit 3200 are realized, and the space in the depth direction is not wasted, and the liquid crystal It can be avoided that the drive mechanism of the rear movable unit is visually recognized at the periphery.

  Further, in this embodiment, the drive mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is the lateral side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (in the depth direction, substantially the same depth as the main liquid crystal). In order to move the liquid crystal frame portions of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the liquid crystal devices to the front side of the liquid crystal unit 3400 in front view. A back box 3010 having a rear standing wall 3312 is provided so as to conceal the liquid crystal frame portion and the drive mechanism (so that it is difficult for the player to see from the front view). This makes it possible to prevent a large step between the main liquid crystal display device 3600 and the drive mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 from being created, and to simplify the concealment structure by the rear wall 3312 of the back box 3010. (The rear-standing wall 3312 can be formed into a substantially wall shape with few irregularities).

  Further, in this embodiment, the drive mechanism on the lateral side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided from the front side to the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (exceeding the thickness of the liquid crystal), and thus the main liquid crystal display Providing a drive mechanism by making good use of the lateral space of the device 3600 makes it possible to provide a drive mechanism (as a result, a large liquid crystal drive unit 3400) as much as possible without wasting space in the depth direction.

  In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 96, 100, and 101, the ball is inserted into the receiving port in communication with the receiving port (for example, the starting port) in the right hit game area 2540. The right guide path 3250 which is at least a part of the discharge passage for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine is integrally formed with the right rail portion 3240 constituting the drive mechanism of the full burst drive portion 3230 of the front movable unit 3200. Is provided. According to such a configuration, since the drive mechanism of the front accessory unit 3200 is also used as a discharge passage, the back space can be effectively used. Further, a support member for supporting the full burst drive unit 3230 (in this embodiment, the right rail unit 3240 is fixed to a base member (back box 3010) for stable driving of the movable accessory. ), The influence of vibration and the like when the movable accessory is driven is suppressed by the rigidity of the support member fixedly fixed, and the ball can be stably guided.

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is allowed to move by the rear standing wall 3312 in which the stepped portion 3315 is formed corresponding to the portion corresponding to the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. Although the drive mechanism is preferably concealed, the step portion 3315 may have a function of regulating the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. In other words, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is moved by driving the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 as described above, but the stepped portion 3315 represents both the initial position when the unit is not driven and the maximum driving position when the unit is driven. It is possible to restrict by one or only one. In particular, when the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 is not driven, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 function as a concealment of the gaps and the frame portion of both display devices so that they can be recognized as a single display device. As for the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 to be moved, it is extremely important to suppress the displacement because the displacement of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 reduces the interest of the player. For this reason, at least the position of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 when the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not driven is naturally regulated by the stepped portion 3315, which is extremely effective in suppressing a decrease in interest.
In this embodiment, the rear standing wall 3312 of the back box 3010 is shaped so as to surround the main liquid crystal display device 3600. For example, the rear wall 3012 is provided only on one side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600. May be provided, or may be provided so as to be erected on both the left and right sides and the upper and lower sides, and the erection position is not limited. For example, in the case where the rear standing wall 3312 is provided so as to stand only on one side, the driving mechanism next to the liquid crystal is also only on one side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 in accordance with the rear standing wall 3312. Will be placed.

  In this embodiment, a liquid crystal decorative member 3630 that can move in front of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) by a driving mechanism provided on the side of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is provided. Although it is always positioned in front of the display device, it is positioned between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and does not have a function of concealing the gap or the frame portion of these display devices. When viewed as a movable movable decorative member, the following aspects may be taken.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the movable decorative member (liquid crystal decorative member 3630), which is supposed to be positioned in front of the display device even when not driven, is positioned behind the rear standing wall 3312 when not driven. It may be concealed together with the drive mechanism, and may appear in front of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 from the rear of the rear standing wall 3312 during driving. Conventionally, the movable decorative member that appears in front of the display device is disposed on the front side of the display device including the drive mechanism. According to this example, the drive mechanism is disposed on the side of the display device (display device). (It may be located on the back side of the display device in the depth direction as well as right next to the display), so that a movable decorative member that effectively utilizes the space in the depth direction using the thickness of the display device is realized. can do. Further, the drive mechanism on the side of the display device and the movable decorative member (corresponding to the liquid crystal decorative member 3630) that can be driven by this drive mechanism are unitized together with the display device, so that the movable decorative member that appears in front of the display device can be obtained. A new form of display device unit can be realized.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the pressing portion 3418 and the plate-shaped member 3450 that are pressed or released when the liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 approach or separate from each other are provided. Adopted as the mechanism of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. According to such a configuration, as a result of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moving away from each other, the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 causes the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 to move. There is no change in the downward driving mode of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 between the time when the pressure is displaced within the pressed range and the time when the pressed portion 3418 is displaced within the range where it does not contact the plate-like member 3450. Nevertheless (although the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 only maintains the drive control for moving the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 downward at a predetermined speed), the moving speed of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is stepwise. In order to change the moving speed of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, this can be done easily without providing a separate drive source or the like. It was able to achieve a gradual change in velocity of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620. According to such a configuration, the upper liquid crystal display device may be caused by a control shift between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620 or a rebound caused by physical interference with each other. Even if there is an unintended gap between 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620, this can be suitably concealed. On the other hand, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is sufficiently overlapped with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 to conceal this gap, the movable accessory (rear edge decoration unit 3700 ( It takes a lot of time to move the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 to form the production space of the body drive unit)). Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the relationship between the pressing portion 3418 and the plate-like member 3450 is adjusted so that the speed can be increased over the entire area at least in the portion overlapping the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. Therefore, the movable accessory (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving unit)) on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 appears even though the upper liquid crystal driving unit and the lower liquid crystal driving unit are operating. It is suitably suppressed that this time is required. In this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is overlapped with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. However, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is not necessarily overlapped, and the movable accessory (rear end decoration object unit 3700 (body) on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is not necessarily overlapped. The driving unit)) may be overlapped with all or a part of the gap to the extent that it cannot be seen from the gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower display liquid crystal device 3620 in the front view.

  In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. When displacing, the movable decorative portion 3710 exceeds the expectation by displacing the movable decorative portion 3710 itself in a direction (rear direction) opposite to the specific direction by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. Although it was decided to appear as if it was displaced forward to a certain extent, the movement of such a movable accessory is not limited to the depth direction (forward direction, backward direction), and can be performed in other directions, for example, It may be in the height direction or the horizontal direction. In this case, unlike the depth direction, the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction can be easily seen by the player, so it is difficult to expect an effect beyond the expectation. It is still possible to achieve a production that is difficult to achieve in the front space. In order to make it difficult for the player to see the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction from the player side, the player moves the movable decoration portion 3710 to emit light during the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction. You may do things like gather your attention. Further, the specific direction and the direction opposite to the specific direction do not necessarily have to be shifted by 180 degrees, and the above-described effects can be obtained as long as the direction component is included. Further, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the rotation operation by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. It is also possible to adopt the operation.

  In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in a specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. Although the effect pattern is shown in which the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is displaced in the direction opposite to the specific direction (rearward direction) by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720, the present invention is not limited to this. A special effect pattern is adopted in which the forward drive motor 3720 and the combined drive motors 3730a and 3b simultaneously move in the forward direction without moving in the direction opposite to the direction (backward), and the movable decorative portion 3710 appears. It may be. In this case, the union effect by the union drive motors 3730a and 3b is not performed without the effect of whether or not the union drive motors 3730a and 3b move after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720. Therefore, the player can be recognized as a united pattern, and when the expectation of the united effect is high, the player can be more focused on the effect.

  Alternatively, an effect pattern may be adopted in which only the forward drive motor 3720 moves alone and the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730 return without moving. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect of whether or not the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b move to the combined effect. Furthermore, it is denied that only the forward drive motor 3720 moves alone to the maximum position, so that the operation of the combined drive motors 3730a and 3b is performed due to the above-described restriction of “A” (the combined drive motor 3730a, It may be made to function as an effect (disappointing effect) as if the space in which b can operate is crushed. In addition, after this denial, a merged drive motor 3730a, b may move and a revival pattern that leads to a merged effect may be adopted, and when this revival pattern develops to a merged effect, the expectation is higher than the merged confirmation pattern. May be.

  Further, an effect pattern may be employed in which only the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730 move independently and the forward drive motor 3720 does not move. In this case, by providing a single movable effect pattern (a pattern in which only the united drive motors 3730a and 3730 move and a pattern in which only the forward drive motor 3720 moves), when both drive sources are driven, they fit within the space. It is preferable to make the player remember the feeling that he will not be able to stop. In addition, a thrilling effect that the movable decorative portion 3710 may hit the glass on the front surface of the gaming machine beyond a limited space (the space in front of the liquid crystal) can also be realized by an accessory.

  In this embodiment, as described above, each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d is separated from the state in which each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d forms a specific decoration (the state shown in FIGS. 113 and 117), and the specific decoration is temporarily provided. Each of them is positioned so that it does not break and no decorations appear (state of FIG. 118). After that, each of the movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d is combined with a surface different from that used to produce the specific decoration, so that a decoration having a larger shape in front view than the specific decoration is newly added. It was decided to produce an effect to be produced (state shown in FIG. 119). According to such a configuration, since the prejudice that it is a role that forms a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance is overturned, a different decoration is newly created without returning to the specific decoration. It becomes possible to provide an effect production that exceeds the expectations of the person.

  In this embodiment, after separating from the state of forming the specific decoration, the movable decoration portions 3710a to 3710d are combined again to generate a new decoration. The movable decorative portions 3710a to 3710d may generate a new decoration in combination with, for example, another movable decorative member provided in front of the liquid crystal or a center accessory. , When positioned so as to form one decoration with the second decoration, and when positioned so as to form one decoration with the third decoration). Even in this case, since the prejudice that it is a character that forms a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance is overturned, and a different decoration is newly created without returning to the specific decoration, the player's expectation It becomes possible to provide an effect production that exceeds. Then, by combining this with the above-described embodiment, for example, after separating from a state where a specific decoration is formed, each movable decoration portion 3710a to 3710d is different from the case where the specific decoration is produced. Whether to create a new decoration by combining with the surface, or to generate a new decoration by combining with other movable decorative members or decorations of the center role, etc., is selected according to the expectation of jackpot By doing so, the player will face the game while paying attention to which direction to proceed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, a specific decorative form (in the embodiment, a design that is a symbol of a team) remains in the standby position (original position) behind the main liquid crystal display device 3600. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the decoration mode generated from the time when the movable decorative portion 3710 appears. In addition, in this embodiment, since the movable decorative portion 3710 is exposed by the movement of the liquid crystal display device, a specific decoration can appear without the movable body itself being operated.

  In this embodiment, as described above, in a specific decorative state (the state shown in FIG. 113), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device has a size that can be moved in the depth direction. On the other hand, in a state in which a specific decoration is destroyed and a new decoration is generated (a state of a body accessory, for example, the state of FIG. 119), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device is set to the depth. A larger decorative shape that cannot be moved in any direction. As a result, the movable range of the liquid crystal display device and the arrangement space behind the liquid crystal can be suppressed with respect to the required shape of the movable accessory, and the display on the liquid crystal when the movable accessory is rendered. It is possible to achieve a relatively large effect production without greatly sacrificing the production.

  Further, regarding the movable decoration portion 3710, in a state where the decoration is temporarily broken from the state of the specific decoration shape (the state of FIG. 113) and a new decoration is created (the state of the robot body, the state of FIG. 119), the specific decoration Since it is also connected to other movable bodies (drive unit 3210 and shoulder drive unit 3220) that were not connected in the shape state (the state of FIG. 113), it is possible to dramatically improve the variation and size that can be realized as an accessory effect. become able to.

  In addition, the movable accessory that can move in front of the liquid crystal is conventionally arranged at a position behind the center accessory so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the periphery of the liquid crystal. Since a part is visually recognized, the effect effect can be imaged before driving, and there is a possibility that the surprise of the effect effect cannot be given sufficiently. In this regard, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is kept waiting behind the liquid crystal display device that cannot be visually recognized in normal times, and the liquid crystal is moved to appear in front of the liquid crystal during driving, thereby eliminating such a fear. doing. Further, since the movable decorative portion 3710 appears from the rear of the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to visually recognize the link mechanism when the movable accessory is put out in front of the liquid crystal display device. An impression can be given to the player as if the decoration portion 3710 appeared.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, in the state of being installed in the hall, the detent torque of the drive motor is added to the downward force due to the weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. The drive motor and the urging member are provided so that the combined value of the urging force by the urging member (the combined value of the direction components acting in the opposite direction with respect to its own weight) becomes larger or substantially the same. According to such a configuration, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 do not necessarily have to be provided with the driving force by the drive source regardless of the position in the movable range. Can be used as the original position (production stop position).

  For this reason, for example, as the original position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, a plurality of positions with a high degree of expectation of jackpot are set as the distance from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 increases, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is positioned at any of the plurality of positions. Depending on whether or not the expectation level of jackpots developed in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be different (for example, even if the same effect is displayed, it is at a position away from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 The higher the liquid crystal display device 3610, the higher the degree of expectation). As a result, even if the variation time until the jackpot result is displayed is long, the driving position for driving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is not required, and the predetermined position in the movable range is set as the original position. It can be achieved.

  Further, the effect using a plurality of positions in the movable range as the original position may be performed across a plurality of variations. For example, the position where the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is arranged differs according to the production mode over a plurality of fluctuations. For example, the higher the liquid crystal display device 3610 is located with respect to the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the more likely the so-called probability fluctuation state is. A high degree of production can also be realized. The plurality of fluctuations may be a long period of time ranging from a maximum of four fluctuations called so-called pre-reading effects to a fluctuation of, for example, 50 times. In a situation where it is possible to easily change the original position according to the degree of expectation or the like within the period without requiring driving of the driving source for holding the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. It is possible to realize an effect that spans multiple variations using the position of the movable range as the original position.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, until the gaming machine is used, it should be arranged (for example, flat) so that its own weight does not act on the urging force of the urging member (horizontal etc.). Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the urging function at least until it is used (automatic deterioration suppressing function). In this case, the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the urging member 3412 are respectively provided so that the urging force by the urging member 3412 is larger than the detent torque, so that the urging force of the urging member is self-weighted. In an arrangement (for example, flat) such that the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are arranged so as not to work (horizontal etc.), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move upward to the upper end in the movable range. In addition, about the specific position (position which moved upwards to the upper end) which will be located by the automatic degradation suppression function, it is preferable not to employ a plurality of positions in the movable range as the original positions.

  In this embodiment, as described above, an example in which the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move in the vertical direction has been described, but the direction is not limited as long as it includes a vertical movement component. As long as the moving component in the up and down direction is included, at least the weight of the liquid crystal display device is generated in the state of being installed in the hall, so that adjustment can be achieved by the detent torque and the urging force by the urging member.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is shown by taking the liquid crystal as an example, but the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal, and for example, a dot display, an organic EL display Various displays such as these can be employed, and structures other than the display such as decorations may be used.

  Further, the method of urging the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be either urging by pulling force or urging by pushing force. In addition, when a plurality of positions in the movable range are used as the original positions, the driving force that contributes to remain at the original positions may be applied when the position is fixed at any position in the movable range.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is in front of the liquid crystal, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 appears and is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. I made it. According to such a configuration, the rear movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced further to the front side than the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 that has been produced in the front row so far, so that it is not conscious as a player's production space. The front space, which does not even use the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 in the front row, is used, so that it is possible to realize a production that exceeds the expectation of “how far is it going”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the movable decorative portion 3710 performs an effect operation at a position overlapping the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in front view. In order to replace such movable accessories in the front-rear direction, the space in the front-rear direction is extremely limited, so it is meaningless if the relationship between the two in the front-rear direction is not grasped. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, an effect operation is performed at a position overlapping the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 in a front view. Is clearly recognized by the player, and the effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction that cannot be achieved by liquid crystal display (the effect of the three-dimensional movable accessory effect) can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable decoration portion 3710 does not perform the rendering operation when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 performs the rendering operation in front of the liquid crystal in the normal state, and the movable decoration portion 3710 does not perform the rendering operation than the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 during the special time. The liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is prevented from performing the presentation operation by going out to the front side. Even if the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 and the movable decoration part 3710 are produced side by side in the front-rear direction, the movable body located behind is relatively inconspicuous and there is a concern that the production effect will be low. By performing the front side of the movable body on the side where the body does not perform the rendering operation, it is possible to maximize the rendering effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3710 has a narrow movable area on the rear side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, and extends to the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 so that the movable area is widened. Accordingly, since the movable decorative portion 3710 appears from a narrow movable area and then comes to the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the movable decorative portion 3710 is transformed into a decoration larger than the narrow movable area at the time of appearance. The impression of the switching operation in the front-rear direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 that has come out beyond is strongly given, and the effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction can be further drawn.

  In addition, the movable decorative portion 3710 has an effect pattern that appears to be visible to the player while remaining in the rear position of the liquid crystal display device, but does not appear again in front of the liquid crystal display device. May be. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player a preconception that the movable decorative portion 3710 is a movable body on the rear side. When the movable decorative portion 3710 actually appears and moves to the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the rear The prejudice of the movable body on the side makes it possible to give the impression that the movable decorative portion 3710 has moved a considerable distance from the back to the front, and further brings out the effects of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction. Will be able to.

  Further, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is on the front side, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves at a position overlapping the movable decoration portion 3710 in front view. Then, after the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves to a position that does not overlap the movable decoration part 3710 in front view, the movable decoration part 3710 comes out. Then, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves at a position overlapping on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 that has moved to a position where it does not overlap. In realizing this movement, the space behind the LCD can be saved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 and the movable decoration part 3710 are interchanged in the depth direction, and the decoration part that has come out to the front side performs the rendering operation. After 3710 comes out before the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, an effect operation of combining with the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out before the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the other movable bodies (the face drive portion 3210 and the shoulder drive portion 3220) also have their production space. An effect operation that comes out of use and merges with the movable decoration portion 3710 is performed. In other words, until the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out in front, the movement control is performed so that the player is not aware that the space before the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is used for production. An impression when the body appears is strongly given to the player, and an effect operation that further enhances the effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction can be realized.

  In this embodiment, both the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 are moved and switched in the depth direction. However, if at least one of them moves and the depth direction is switched, the same effect as described above is obtained. There is an effect.

[6. Control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. The control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, a main control board that performs game control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, and then a peripheral control board that performs effect control will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the main control board. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game, and includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  The main control MPU 4100a is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The ROM stores, for example, a main control program that controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and that controls a gaming operation.

  The main control input circuit 4100b receives detection signals from various detection switches. The main control output circuit 4100c outputs various signals to an external substrate or the like. The main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d drives various solenoids for a movable accessory. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors a sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a predetermined voltage.

  In addition to RAM (hereinafter “main control built-in RAM”) and ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 4100a includes a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various detection switches are input to various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c includes a main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has a reset function in which a reset terminal is provided for forcibly resetting information in which various signals are input to various input terminals to output various signals to an external substrate or the like. .

  The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is based on the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured to output signals from various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the start port switch 3022 and the general winning port switch 3020 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. The start port switch 3022 is a general term for the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004c. The general winning opening switch 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104.

  In addition, detection signals from the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Input to the input terminal of the port. The gate switch 2352 detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003. The count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2003. The magnetic detection switch 3024 is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects fraud using a magnet.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is output. Outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. To do.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the function display are displayed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Signals are output to various displays via the substrate 1191. The various displays include a first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, a first special symbol storage display 1184, a second special symbol storage display 1187, a normal symbol display 1189, and a normal symbol storage display. A device 1188, a gaming status indicator 1183, and a round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that the payout control board is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Various information (game information) is output to 4110. Further, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. ) Is output.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the start opening switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning opening switch 3020 is used. The contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004c, and the gate also passes frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequently performed. Occur. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352.

  In addition, when a big hit gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game balls. To do. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, since game balls do not frequently enter the general winning opening 2001, detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening switch 3020.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of a predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby providing a payout control board from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to 4110 as serial data.

  When the payout control board 4110 has successfully received various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. The payer ACK signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal.

  When the control MPU 4100a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it sends a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to 4100ca. The main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined serial output port. Then, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off.

  Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored in the operation signal (RAM) when the operation switch (RAM clear switch) of the payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Clear signal) is output from the payout control board 4110. The RAM clear signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. The main control MPU 4100a completely erases (clears) the contents of the main control built-in RAM, triggered by the input of the RAM clear signal.

  Next, a peripheral control board that performs effect control will be described. FIG. 131 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165, and a volume adjustment volume 4140a.

  Peripheral control unit 4150 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 4100. Also, the input operation information of the operation means such as the upper plate effect button 257 is received to control the effect operation. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, while a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame. In addition, sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from a speaker provided on the door frame is performed.

  The RTC control unit 4165 is a time measuring unit that holds calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. The volume adjustment volume 4140a adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by rotating the knob portion.

  Peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control includes peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”). And).

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Also, it stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on and controls the rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c includes various information (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that is continued across the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Information for managing schedule data for defining a screen to be rendered in 3600, schedule data for defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, and the like.

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing a special performance flag, etc.). The peripheral control external WDT 4150e monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ) Cannot hold the stored content. On the other hand, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d receives the backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board, and stores the stored contents in 50%. It can be held for about an hour.

  Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. As a result, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d cannot retain the stored content and loses the content.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset in hardware. That is, the reset is performed when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, and can prevent resetting.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, control signals are transmitted to various boards for effect control such as the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 based on the received various commands. .

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 by lamp driving. The data is transmitted from the board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). In addition, game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the periphery. It transmits to the motor drive board | substrate 4180 via a control output circuit.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame from a peripheral I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The signal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate. Further, the door side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame is output from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. The signal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided on the handle unit 500 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit, and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Then, the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal plate, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I / O for operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is input to the port.

  From detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and further from push switches such as effect buttons This detection signal is serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 and the like. The serialized detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7. Various control processes of main control board]
[7-1. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the main control program, thereby executing the main control side power-on process. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main-control-side power-on processing.

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a first executes an initialization process (step S10). In the initialization process, the execution condition of the interrupt process is set, and the data to be stored in the main control built-in RAM is set according to the activation state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the backed up game information to restore the state before the power is shut off. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is turned on when the hall is opened (when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated), a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM is executed.

  When the initialization process ends, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S11). The power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notice when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure notice voltage when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs.

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected (the result of step S11 is “No”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a non-winning random number update process (step S12). In the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. Non-winning random numbers include, for example, reach determination random numbers, variation display pattern random numbers, big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like. Thereafter, the non-winning random number update process is continuously executed until a power failure notice signal is detected.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a detects a power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 4100a executes main control-side power-off processing for protecting game information stored in the main control built-in RAM (step S12). In the main control side power-off process, first, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM, thereby protecting the game information from being rewritten. Further, the output of the drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2105 and the function display unit is stopped, a checksum for determining the validity of the game information at the time of power failure recovery is calculated, and a backup flag is set.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or is instantaneously stopped, and after the power is restored, the main control side power-on process is executed and protected by the main control side power-off process. Based on the game information, restore the state before the power failure.

[7-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process (FIG. 132).

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2103, a detection signal from a start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the start port 2101, and an illegal act using a magnet The detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting the prize ball, the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process, and the like are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs timer update processing for managing time by subtracting from the set measurement time until the timer interrupt period (4 ms) becomes 0 (step S76). The measurement time in the timer update process includes, for example, a special symbol change time corresponding to a special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process. In addition to the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the symbol variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the dispensing control substrate 4110 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is input. Time (ACK signal input determination time).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created, or a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. . Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2103, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or the payout control board 4110 receives the prize ball command. When a payer ACK signal notifying that the reception has been completed normally is not input within a predetermined time, a payout control board 4110 is created by creating a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. Or send to.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a frame command reception process (step S82). In the frame command reception process, various commands output from the payout control board 4110 are received.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103), etc. Create a winning abnormality display command as an abnormal state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value ("special lottery"), or whether or not the jackpot symbol random number matches the probability change hit determination value. (Determining whether or not to generate a probability variation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, when a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, a random number for determination per normal symbol is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol determination matches the determination value for normal symbol (“normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the lower start port 2102 is achieved, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a port output process (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control program, for example, sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 4110 when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. When it is in a big hit gaming state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the big prize opening 2103, or a drive signal to a start port solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106 In addition to output, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output information, start port Various information (game information) signals related to games such as winning information output signals are paid out. And outputs to the substrate 4110.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes a command for instructing execution of an effect by a liquid crystal display device or a movable accessory, a command for notifying a gaming state, occurrence of an error, and the like.

  Finally, the main control MPU 4100a executes register switching (returning) (step S96), and ends the main control timer interrupt processing. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose register in the stack area in hardware. As a result, the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main process on the main control side are prevented from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets an interrupt permission after the process of step S96.

[7-3. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the start port 2101, that is, every time when the start condition is satisfied (start condition is satisfied), the start memory information (start information) is satisfied. A big hit determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state (special gaming state) is generated based on the lottery result, and the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (predetermined winning condition is established) ), The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a big winning opening (step S100). When a game ball has won a big winning opening (the result of step S100 is “yes”), a big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning opening (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has won at the start winning opening is determined by reading the presence / absence of a detection signal from the start opening switch 3022 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). This is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM.

  When the game ball wins the start opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a start opening winning time process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a start opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball wins at the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special design For example, a process for executing a pre-reading effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electrical accessory action number that is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. End the process. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and is therefore backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), as branch processing, Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening the big winning opening (step S140), big winning port opening processing (step S142), special winning opening closing process (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start winning opening, processing for starting the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start winning opening, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped generates a jackpot gaming state.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit gaming state is generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed.

  In the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S140), a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each big winning opening by performing the opening / closing member from the closed state to the opened state is performed.

  In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by changing the open / close member from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process for notifying that is performed.

[7-4. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric utility product control process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not being executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the special symbol variation display is performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol actuated balls is not zero. Note that the number of special symbol operation reserved balls is stored for each start winning opening when a plurality of starting winning openings are provided. If the special symbol variation is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol variation display is not started, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a sets a retained ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Further, the variable type classification value is acquired from the variable type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type category value to the command value set in the process of step S452. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S466). Further, a variable state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process.

[7-5. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the number of special symbol actuated balls (step S530). The special symbol operation reservation ball number is stored in the special symbol operation reservation ball number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol actuated balls and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, main control MPU 4100a performs a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a searches for the variation time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times. The main control MPU 4100a then adds the variation time addition value retrieved in step S552 to the reference variation time value retrieved in step S546 to obtain the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electrical accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[7-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control MPU 4100a first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. Fluctuation information source table is hit (win fluctuation selection information state table), out of date (outside fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) Table) and table information for referring to the variation type (variation type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When the big hit is won (the result of step S350 is “yes”), the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the fluctuation information number search process, a fluctuation information number for determining a hit fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the big hit fluctuation selection information type table. The main control MPU 4100a obtains the variation pattern random number 1 from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning when the big win or the small win is not won (the result of Step S350 is “no”) (Step S350). S372).

  When the reach is not generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the variation variation selection information suspension table based on the number of retained balls (step S372). S376).

  On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the reach variation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is obtained by the fluctuation information number search process, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages by using two types of random numbers, that is, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (a variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The method of lottery is not limited to the method of lottery in two steps, and a method of lottery in three or more steps may be used, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by one random number for variation pattern.

[8. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when the peripheral control unit is turned on. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[8-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 executes the peripheral control unit power-on process by executing the effect control program. The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an initial setting process when the peripheral control unit power-on process is started (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. Can do. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko machines related to control of game effects output from the main control board 4100 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by, for example, writing “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  Subsequently, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the effect control program executes current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 acquires calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, second, and the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. At 4150 cad, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and is 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When not executed, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the blank signal interrupt processing.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed (the result of step S1008 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first starts the steady process flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set to (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed is calculated. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (FIG. 139).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a lamp data output process (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 created by the lamp data creation process Output side emission data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, whether or not each operation means is operated is monitored based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Then, it is determined appropriately whether or not it is reflected in the game effect.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Output to the device 244.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data of the music and sound effects created in the sound data creation process, as well as sound data such as notification sounds and notification sounds. .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, the schedule data for instructing the timing for outputting the screen data, the light emission data, the sound data, the driving data such as the movable accessory, etc. is updated. For example, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are analyzed in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) (command analyzing means). According to the analysis result of the received command, the gaming state is recognized and the corresponding effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a warning process (step S1024). In the warning processing, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation for executing various abnormality notifications Schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are set. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 are updated. By the RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which are time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the date, which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, is updated.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation processing, game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards is created.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data to be output to the liquid crystal display device is created. When the created screen data is input, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and sprite data from the extracted at least one character data. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the music and effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data are extracted by extracting sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controlling the built-in sound source. Incorporates sound data such as sound and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a backup process (step S1034). In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached are copied to the backup area for backup.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006 again. Then, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1. If it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is executed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is input. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[8-2. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. .

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 42), and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. It is a counter that counts the number of times it is done. In the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms. Therefore, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit steady process is 1 ms. After the interrupt timer is started, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

  If the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100 (the result of step S1100 is “NO”), that is, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a directly ends the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (the result of step S1100 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral controller power-on process, and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The number of times will increase by one.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a motor and solenoid drive process (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid arranged in time series. An electric drive source such as a solenoid is driven.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information, Moveable position history information etc.). From the created history information, the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In the operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the pressing operation unit 405). Operation history information, etc.). The presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a drawing state acquisition process (S1110). Further, a backup process is executed (step S1112), and this process ends. In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached are copied to the backup area for backup.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 in the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 in a period of about 33.3 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is controlled not to be executed 33 times or more by counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN while the peripheral control unit steady process is executed once. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains information on the game (a jackpot determination result, a current game progress status, etc.) from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) while such processing progress is being performed. Based on the acquired information, control related to various effects is performed. As the control related to these effects, in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time determined by the main control board 4100 appears, or during the big hit game In addition to making the effect image appear, any one of various ornaments arranged on the game board 5 including the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 (or a plurality of appropriate ornaments) ), Or any one of these ornaments (or appropriate ornaments) is emitted.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, as one of the controls related to various effects, causes the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 to display specific effect images straddling these two display surfaces. It is possible to perform control that causes the two display surfaces to appear, and control that causes different effect images to appear on the two display surfaces.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment executes the specific movable effect as one of the controls related to various effects, and during the period when the specific movable effect is performed, The movable decorative portion 3710, which is one of them, can emit light.

  The movable decorative portion 3710 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 940 Interface control board box 950 Delivery control board box 951 Delivery control board 980 Back cover 1000 Panel decoration 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guidance part 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1111 Out port 1183 Game state indicator 1184 First special symbol memory indicator 1185 First special symbol indicator 1186 Second special symbol indicator 1187 Second special symbol memory Indicator 1188 Normal symbol memory indicator 1189 Normal symbol indicator 1190 Round indicator 1191 Function display board 1200 Substrate holder 1300 Main control unit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1610 Lower display liquid crystal device 2000 Game panel 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 First first winning opening 2006 Second second winning opening 2006a Receiving section 2006b Shelf 2021 V prize opening 2100 Panel board 2101 Start opening 2102 Lower start opening 2103 Large prize opening 2104 General prize opening 2105 Start opening solenoid 2106 Movable piece 2107 Opening / closing member 2108 Attacker solenoid 2110 Count switch 2112 Opening 2113 Spare part 2122 Passing through start opening Hole 2123 Warp hole 2200 Start-up unit 2203 Shelf 2205 Decorative plate 2220 Warp inlet 2500 Center accessory 2510 Center base 2511 Franc G part 2522 Warp outlet 2523 Guide way 2530 Stage 2540 Right-handed game area 2541 Upper right circulation space 2542 Route changing member 2545 Decoration member 2547 Gate sensor 2551 Second start-up sensor 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3050 Warp passage 3100 Back decoration unit 3110 Back Upper decoration unit 3120 Back decoration left unit 3130 Back decoration lower unit 3200 Front side accessory unit 3210 Face drive unit 3210a Left face part 3210b Right face part 3220 Shoulder drive part 3220a Left arm part 3220b Right arm part 3230 Full burst drive part (lower part)
3250 Right guiding path 3251 Rib portion 3300 Rear side accessory unit 3310 Back box 3315 Stepped portion 3316 Right lower sphere passage unit 3320 Liquid crystal drive unit 3400 Liquid crystal drive unit 3410 Upper liquid crystal drive unit 3411 Upper liquid crystal holding member 3412 Energizing member 3413 Guide rod 3414 Bearing part 3415 Upper liquid crystal drive motor 3416 Rack gear 3418 Press part 3420 Upper liquid crystal drive gear 3421 Upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421a Large diameter transmission gear 3421b Small diameter transmission gear 3422 Transmission gear 3423 Lifting drive gear 3440 Lower liquid crystal drive unit 3441 Lower liquid crystal holding member 3442 Biasing member 3443 Guide shaft 3444 Bearing portion 3445 Lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445a Large diameter transmission gear 3446 Rack gear 3450 Plate-like member 3450 Guide slit 3450b Rack gear 3451 Transmission gear 3480 Liquid crystal container 3480a Upper liquid crystal container 3480b Lower liquid crystal container 3480c Opening 3485 Motor container 3486 Motor container 3600 Liquid crystal display device 3610 Upper liquid crystal display device 3620 Lower liquid crystal display device 3630 Liquid crystal decoration member 3630a Guide part 3630b Rack gear 3631 Rotating member 3700 Body drive part 3700a Front decoration part 3701 Base part 3710 Movable decoration part 3710a Upper left movable decoration part 3710b Lower left movable decoration part 3710c Upper right movable decoration part 3710d Lower right movable decoration part 3715 Advance drive Motor 3721 First rack gear 3722 Second rack gear 3725 Drive gear 3730 Combined drive motor 3734 Drive shaft 3735 Screw gear (worm)
3736 Gear (worm wheel)
3738 Rotating gear 4100 Main control board 4110 Dispensing control board 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining based on the progress of the game;
Display means for performing display according to the result of determination by the determination means;
With specific ornaments that are movably provided,
The display means includes
The first display area and the second display area have a first display area and a second display area, and the first display area and the second display area are mutually displayed in a state where a specific effect image is displayed across the two display areas. At least one of these display areas is movable so that the positional relationship of
The specific ornament is
When the specific effect image is displayed across the first display area and the second display area across a specific place where the specific effect image cannot be displayed, the display areas are displayed in front view. It can be positioned so as to overlap the specific part between
further,
The specific ornament is
In a front view, when positioned so as to overlap with the specific part between the first display area and the second display area, the specific effect image cannot be displayed and includes the specific part. 1st display area and said 2nd display area are located in the form of straddling in front view ahead of those display areas, and said 1st display across said specific location It is possible to emit light at the position in front of the specific effect image displayed in a manner straddling the area and the second display area,
further,
The specific ornament can form one ornament with other ornaments,
In the state where the one decoration is formed, among the plurality of decorations forming the one decoration, the specific decoration includes the first display area and the second display area including the specific part. The predetermined decorations included in the other decorations are positioned so as to overlap the first display area in front view with respect to both the display area and the front side of the display area. The gaming machine is located at a position that does not overlap with the second display area when viewed from the front.